WO2022138040A1 - Discrimination method for determining depressive state, and depressive state determination system - Google Patents

Discrimination method for determining depressive state, and depressive state determination system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022138040A1
WO2022138040A1 PCT/JP2021/044218 JP2021044218W WO2022138040A1 WO 2022138040 A1 WO2022138040 A1 WO 2022138040A1 JP 2021044218 W JP2021044218 W JP 2021044218W WO 2022138040 A1 WO2022138040 A1 WO 2022138040A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
activity
subject
time zone
age
acceleration
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/044218
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
陽子 小松
浩 功刀
亮 篠▲崎▼
Original Assignee
東洋紡株式会社
国立研究開発法人国立精神・神経医療研究センター
ユニオンツール株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 東洋紡株式会社, 国立研究開発法人国立精神・神経医療研究センター, ユニオンツール株式会社 filed Critical 東洋紡株式会社
Priority to JP2022572041A priority Critical patent/JP7276759B2/en
Publication of WO2022138040A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022138040A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B10/00—Other methods or instruments for diagnosis, e.g. instruments for taking a cell sample, for biopsy, for vaccination diagnosis; Sex determination; Ovulation-period determination; Throat striking implements
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/103—Detecting, measuring or recording devices for testing the shape, pattern, colour, size or movement of the body or parts thereof, for diagnostic purposes
    • A61B5/11—Measuring movement of the entire body or parts thereof, e.g. head or hand tremor, mobility of a limb
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61B—DIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B5/00—Measuring for diagnostic purposes; Identification of persons
    • A61B5/24—Detecting, measuring or recording bioelectric or biomagnetic signals of the body or parts thereof
    • A61B5/316—Modalities, i.e. specific diagnostic methods
    • A61B5/318—Heart-related electrical modalities, e.g. electrocardiography [ECG]
    • A61B5/346—Analysis of electrocardiograms
    • A61B5/349—Detecting specific parameters of the electrocardiograph cycle
    • A61B5/352—Detecting R peaks, e.g. for synchronising diagnostic apparatus; Estimating R-R interval

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a determination method for determining a depressed state and a depressed state determination system.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a determination method for determining depression according to the age and gender of a subject, and a depression determination system. do.
  • the determination method for determining a depressed state is as follows [1].
  • the beat interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity (hereinafter referred to as "activity amount") accompanying the movement of the subject.
  • Discrimination method including.
  • the first predetermined age and the second predetermined age are each one of 33 to 37 years old, and LF and HF include a step of frequency spectrum conversion of the beat interval. It is a value obtained by definitely integrating the obtained power spectrum, and C1 to C4 are constants.
  • A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 are constants.
  • D1 is a constant.
  • the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1 is defined as the negative acceleration T
  • the subject's acceleration is defined as a negative acceleration T.
  • the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T
  • the longest time zone in which the following equation (25) is satisfied is the sleep time zone.
  • D1 is a constant.
  • [1c] C1 is 5 to 15, C2 is 0.5 to 0.9, C3 is 10 to 14, and C4 is 0.45 to 0.55 [1] to [13].
  • the determination method according to any one of [1a] and [1b].
  • [1d] C1 is 15, C2 is 0.5, C3 is 14, and C4 is 0.45. Any one of [1] to [13], [1a], and [1b].
  • the discrimination method described in. [3a] A1 is 160 to 180, B1 is 80 to 100, A2 is 130 to 150, B2 is 70 to 90, A3 is 160 to 180, B3 is 55 to 65, A4 is 145 to 165, and B4 is 50 to 60.
  • A1 is 160
  • B1 is 80
  • A2 is 130
  • B2 is 70
  • A3 is 160
  • B3 is 55
  • A4 is 145
  • B4 is 50 [3] to [13], [1a] to [1d].
  • A5a A5 is 36000 to 46000
  • B5 is 23000 to 26000
  • C5 is 0.070 to 0.080
  • A6 is 37000 to 41000
  • B6 is 15000 to 18000
  • C6 is 0.08 to 0.10
  • A7 is 57000.
  • the depression state determination system that has been able to solve the above problems is as follows [14], and preferred embodiments are the following [15] to [17] and [14a] to [14e]. , [15a] to [15c], [16a] to [16c]. [14]
  • the processing unit that calculates LF and HF by constant integration of the power spectrum obtained including the steps, and the left side of the following formula are calculated according to the gender and age of the subject, and the value of the left side is the following formula.
  • a depression state determination system comprising: a determination unit for determining that the subject is in a depressed state when the magnitude relationship is satisfied.
  • the determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following equations according to the gender and age of the subject, and when the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following equation, the subject.
  • the depression state determination system according to [14], wherein the examiner is controlled to determine that he / she is in a depression state.
  • the determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and when the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula, the subject.
  • the depression state determination system according to [14] or [15], wherein the examiner is controlled to determine that the person is in a depressed state.
  • [14c] The depression state determination system according to any one of [14] to [17], [14a], and [14b], wherein C1> C3 and C2> C4.
  • C1 is 5 to 15, C2 is 0.5 to 0.9, C3 is 10 to 14, and C4 is 0.45 to 0.55 [14] to [17].
  • the depression state determination system according to any one of [14a] to [14c].
  • [14e] C1 is 15, C2 is 0.5, C3 is 14, and C4 is 0.45. Any one of [14] to [17] and [14a] to [14c].
  • [15a] The depression state determination system according to any one of [15] to [17] and [14a] to [14e], wherein A1> A2, A3> A4, B1> B2, and B3> B4.
  • A1 is 160 to 180
  • B1 is 80 to 100
  • A2 is 130 to 150
  • B2 is 70 to 90
  • A3 is 160 to 180
  • B3 is 55 to 65
  • A4 is 145 to 165
  • B4 is 50 to 60.
  • the depression state determination system according to any one of [15] to [17] and [14a] to [14e].
  • A1 is 160
  • B1 is 80
  • A2 is 130
  • B2 is 70
  • A3 is 160
  • B3 is 55
  • A4 is 145
  • B4 is 50 [15] to [17], [14a] to [14e].
  • the depression state determination system according to any one of the items.
  • [16a] A5 ⁇ A6, A7> A8, B5> B6, B7> B8, C5 ⁇ C6, C7 ⁇ C8 [16], [17], [14a] to [14e], [15a] to [15c]
  • the depression state determination system according to any one of the items.
  • A5 is 36000 to 46000
  • B5 is 23000 to 26000
  • C5 is 0.070 to 0.080
  • A6 is 37000 to 41000
  • B6 is 15000 to 18000
  • C6 is 0.08 to 0.10
  • A7 is 57000.
  • ⁇ 61000 B7 is 28,000 to 34,000
  • C7 is 0.03 to 0.05
  • A8 is 40,000 to 43,000
  • B8 is 17,000 to 20,000
  • C8 is 0.04 to 0.06 [16], [17]
  • the depression state determination system according to any one of [14a] to [14e] and [15a] to [15c].
  • A5 is 36000
  • B5 is 23000
  • C5 is 0.080
  • A6 is 37000
  • B6 is 15000
  • C6 is 0.10
  • A7 is 57000
  • B7 is 28000
  • C7 is 0.05
  • A8 is 40,000
  • B8 is 40,000
  • the determination method for determining depression according to the present invention it is possible to determine whether or not the subject is depressed according to the age and gender of the subject. This promotes consultations with medical institutions and leads to early detection and treatment of depression.
  • FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of power spectrum integration.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a depression state determination system according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the third embodiment.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the fourth embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the fifth embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the sixth embodiment.
  • the discrimination method in order to determine that the subject is in a depressed state, the pulsation interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity accompanying the movement of the subject (hereinafter, "activity").
  • the measurement step for measuring (described as “quantity)
  • ⁇ Measurement step> In the measurement step, the beat interval of the subject and the amount of activity, which is the acceleration or angular velocity associated with the movement of the subject, are measured.
  • the beat interval is preferably a heartbeat or pulse interval (unit: ms).
  • the heartbeat interval may be acquired by reading the interval between the R waves and the R wave from the electrocardiogram, or by measuring the interval between adjacent heartbeats.
  • the pulse interval may be acquired by measuring the interval between adjacent pulses.
  • the beat interval or its fluctuation is said to indicate autonomic nervous activity.
  • RRI RR interval
  • the amount of activity is an acceleration or an angular velocity accompanying the movement of the subject, and may be expressed as a ratio to the gravitational acceleration g (unit: dimensionless quantity).
  • the acceleration A accompanying the movement of the subject is, for example, as expressed by the following equation (I), which is the acceleration measured by using a 3-axis accelerometer or the like in the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions.
  • a value obtained by subtracting the gravitational acceleration g ( 9.8 m / s 2 ) from the square root of the sum of squares of the accelerations x, y, and z (where the unit g represents the magnitude of the gravitational acceleration).
  • the acceleration A when there is no movement is 0.
  • the biaxial accelerometer is attached to the subject so that the measurement direction is perpendicular to the direction of gravity.
  • the accelerometer include myBeat (registered trademark) manufactured by Union Tool Co., Ltd.
  • the accelerometer is preferably placed on the chest or abdomen of the subject, more preferably on the chest.
  • the angular velocity ⁇ is the square root of the sum of squares of the angular velocities ⁇ x , ⁇ y , and ⁇ z around the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis of the subject, and the unit is rad / s or 1 / s. That is, the angular velocity ⁇ is expressed by the following equation (II).
  • the angular velocity detects rotation, it is suitable for detecting, for example, the frequency of turning over of the subject during the sleeping hours.
  • the left side of the above equations (1) to (4) is calculated according to the gender and age of the subject.
  • the left side of one of the above equations (1) to (4) may be calculated for each subject according to the gender and age of the subject.
  • the equations (1) to (4) may be collectively referred to as the first group of equations.
  • the first predetermined age according to the formulas (1) and (2) is preferably any one of 33 to 37 years old, and preferably any one of 34 to 36 years old. It is more preferable to be 35 years old.
  • the second predetermined age according to the formulas (3) and (4) is preferably any one of 33 to 37 years old, and preferably any one of 34 to 36 years old. It is more preferable to be 35 years old.
  • the second predetermined age may be different from the first predetermined age, but is preferably the same age.
  • LF and HF are values obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum obtained by including the step of converting the beat interval into the frequency spectrum.
  • LF is, for example, a value obtained by definitely integrating a power spectrum obtained by including a step of frequency spectrum conversion of a beat interval, which is a time signal f, from frequencies Lf1 to Lf2
  • HF is, for example, the power spectrum obtained by frequency Hf1. It is a value obtained by constant integration from Hf2 to Hf2. It is preferable that Hf1> Lf1 and Hf2> Lf2, and more preferably Hf1> Lf1, Hf2> Lf2, and Hf1 ⁇ Lf2.
  • LF is a constant integration of the power spectrum F 2 (first power spectrum) obtained by squaring the beat interval, which is a time signal f, converted into a frequency spectrum (frequency spectrum F) from frequencies Lf1 to Lf2.
  • the HF can be a value obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum F 2 (first power spectrum) from the frequencies Hf1 (> Lf1) to Hf2 (> Lf2).
  • the unit of LF and HF calculated using the first power spectrum F 2 is ms 2 .
  • the specific values of C1 to C4 are not particularly limited, and should be set according to the conditions such as the integration range of the power spectrum integral, the type of activity (acceleration or angular velocity), the age of the subject, and the gender. Can be done.
  • FFT fast Fourier transform
  • wavelet analysis wavelet analysis
  • maximum entropy method maximum entropy method
  • the discrete Fourier transform G k of the beat interval RRI k obtained by spline-interlacing the beat interval and re-sampling at the sampling interval ⁇ t is expressed by the following equation (III), and the power spectrum F 2 (first power spectrum). (Unit: ms 2 / Hz) is expressed by the following equation (IV).
  • k represents a time series
  • N represents the number of data
  • S is an arbitrary scale
  • S 1 in the power spectrum.
  • the power spectrum F (second power spectrum) (unit: ms) obtained from the value obtained by converting the beat interval into a frequency spectrum may be used as a definite integral over a predetermined interval. ..
  • the units of LF and HF calculated using the second power spectrum F are preferably dimensionless quantities.
  • the power spectrum F (second power spectrum) is represented by the following equation (V).
  • the power spectrum integral will be described with reference to FIG.
  • the vertical axis of FIG. 1 is the power spectrum (unit: ms 2 / Hz), and the horizontal axis is the frequency (unit: Hz).
  • LF is a value obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum F 2 from, for example, 0.04 Hz (Lf1) to 0.15 Hz (Lf2), and is the area of the portion hatched by diagonal lines in FIG.
  • HF is a value obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum F 2 from, for example, 0.15 Hz (Hf1) to 0.4 Hz (Hf2), and is the area of the portion hatched by the vertical line in FIG.
  • Hf1 0.15 Hz
  • Hf2 0.15 Hz
  • Hf2 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range is set so that both Lf2 and Hf1 are equal to 0.15 Hz, but it is preferable that the relationship of Lf1 ⁇ Hf1 and Lf2 ⁇ Hf2 is satisfied, and further the relationship of Hf1 ⁇ Lf2 is satisfied. Is more preferable.
  • the method of power spectrum integration has been described using the first power spectrum F 2 , but definite integral by the second power spectrum F can also be performed in the same manner.
  • the power spectrum obtained by frequency spectrum conversion is divided into LF, which is a component derived from fluctuations in blood pressure and is also called a Mayer-Wave-related component, and HF, which is a component derived from respiration.
  • the blood pressure fluctuation component LF is a power spectrum around 0.1 Hz and is related to both sympathetic nerve activity and parasympathetic nerve activity.
  • the respiratory component HF has a power spectrum around 0.3 Hz and is considered to be related to parasympathetic nerve activity. From the above, the integration range of LF indicating sympathetic nerve activity and parasympathetic nerve activity includes at least 0.1 Hz, and it is preferable that Lf1 ⁇ 0.1 ⁇ Lf2.
  • Lf1 is more preferably 0.03 Hz, further preferably 0.04 Hz.
  • Lf2 is more preferably 0.16 Hz, and even more preferably 0.15 Hz.
  • the integration range of HF indicating parasympathetic nerve activity includes at least 0.3 Hz, and it is preferable that Hf1 ⁇ 0.3 ⁇ Hf2.
  • Hf1 is more preferably 0.14 Hz, and even more preferably 0.15 Hz.
  • Hf2 is more preferably 0.41 Hz, and even more preferably 0.4 Hz.
  • ⁇ Discrimination step> it is determined whether or not the value on the left side calculated in the calculation step satisfies the magnitude relationship of each equation.
  • the discrimination step for a man under the first predetermined age, it is determined whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) / activity amount> C1 of the formula (1) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied.
  • the magnitude relationship when it is determined that the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it means that there is a high possibility of depression.
  • the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 5, more preferably 10, and even more preferably 15.
  • the unit of C1 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • C1 is It is preferably 5, more preferably 10, and even more preferably 15.
  • the unit of C1 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the discrimination step for a man of the first predetermined age or older, it is determined whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ C2 of the formula (2) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied.
  • the magnitude relationship when it is determined that the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it means that there is a high possibility of depression.
  • the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.9, more preferably 0.7, and even more preferably 0.5.
  • the unit of C2 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (2) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100 ⁇ C21.
  • C2 is It is preferably 0.5, more preferably 0.4, and even more preferably 0.3.
  • the unit of C2 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (2) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100 ⁇ C21.
  • the determination step for the second female under a predetermined age, it is determined whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) / activity amount> C3 of the formula (3) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied.
  • the magnitude relationship when it is determined that the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it means that there is a high possibility of depression.
  • the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 10, more preferably 12, and even more preferably 14.
  • the unit of C3 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • C3 is It is preferably 4, more preferably 7, and even more preferably 10.
  • the unit of C3 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the discrimination step for a woman of a second predetermined age or older, it is determined whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ C4 of the formula (4) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied.
  • the magnitude relationship when it is determined that the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it means that there is a high possibility of depression.
  • the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.55, more preferably 0.50, and even more preferably 0.45.
  • the unit of C4 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (4) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100 ⁇ C41.
  • C4 is It is preferably 0.045, more preferably 0.030, and even more preferably 0.015.
  • the unit of C4 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (4) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100 ⁇ C41.
  • the value of (LF / HF) / activity amount in the awakening time zone is more likely to be larger in men than in women. Therefore, by setting C1> C3, the accuracy of determining the depressed state is improved.
  • the method for determining depression is a calculation step for calculating the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and the value of the left side is the magnitude relation of the following formulas. It is preferable to include a determination step for determining whether or not the above is satisfied.
  • the left side of the formula of the first group and the left side of the formula of the second group it is preferable to calculate the left side of the formula of the first group and the left side of the formula of the second group according to the gender and age of the subject. For example, in the case of a male under the first predetermined age, it is preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (5) and / or the equation (6) in addition to the left side of the equation (1). It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the formula (5) or the formula (6), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the formula (1), the formula (5) and the formula (6).
  • the discrimination step for men under the first predetermined age, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the pulsation interval x activity amount ⁇ A1 magnitude relationship in the equation (5) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied.
  • A1 is preferably 180 ms, more preferably 170 ms, and even more preferably 160 ms.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the males under the first predetermined age satisfy the magnitude relationship of HF ⁇ activity amount ⁇ B1 of the formula (6) in the awakening time zone of the subject.
  • B 1 is preferably 100 ms 2 and is preferably 90 ms 2 . Is more preferable, and 80 ms 2 is even more preferable.
  • the equation (6) may be HF ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100 ⁇ B11.
  • B1 is preferably 10 and more preferably 9. It is preferably 8, and more preferably 8.
  • the unit of B1 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the pulsation interval x activity amount ⁇ A2 magnitude relationship of the equation (7) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male of the first predetermined age or older.
  • A2 is preferably 150 ms, more preferably 140 ms, and even more preferably 130 ms.
  • the equation (7) may be set to beat interval ⁇ activity amount / 100 ⁇ A21.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the magnitude relationship of HF ⁇ activity amount ⁇ B2 of the formula (8) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male of the first predetermined age or older.
  • B2 is preferably 90 ms 2 and preferably 80 ms 2 . Is more preferable, and 70 ms 2 is even more preferable.
  • the equation (8) may be HF ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100 ⁇ B21.
  • B2 is preferably 4.5, and 3.5. It is more preferably present, and even more preferably 2.5.
  • the unit of B2 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the pulsation interval x activity amount ⁇ A3 magnitude relationship of the equation (9) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied for the second female under a predetermined age.
  • A3 is preferably 180 ms, more preferably 170 ms, and even more preferably 160 ms.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the female under the second predetermined age satisfies the magnitude relationship of HF ⁇ activity amount ⁇ B3 of the formula (10) in the awakening time zone of the subject.
  • B 3 is preferably 65 ms 2 and preferably 60 ms 2 . Is more preferable, and 55 ms 2 is even more preferable.
  • the equation (10) may be HF ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100 ⁇ B31.
  • B3 is preferably 10 and more preferably 9. It is preferably 8, and even more preferably 8.
  • the unit of B3 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the pulsation interval x activity amount ⁇ A4 magnitude relationship of the equation (11) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied for the second predetermined age or older female.
  • A4 is preferably 165 ms, more preferably 155 ms, and even more preferably 145 ms.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the female of the second predetermined age or older satisfies the magnitude relationship of HF ⁇ activity amount ⁇ B4 of the formula (12) in the awakening time zone of the subject.
  • B4 is preferably 60 ms 2 and 55 ms 2 . Is more preferable, and 50 ms 2 is even more preferable.
  • the equation (12) may be HF ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100 ⁇ B41.
  • B4 is preferably 4.0, preferably 3.5. It is more preferably present, and even more preferably 3.0.
  • the unit of B4 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • A1> A2 Since younger men are more likely to have a larger value of pulsation interval x activity during awakening time than older men, setting A1> A2 improves the accuracy of determining depression. do.
  • A3> A4 Since young women tend to have a larger value of pulsation interval x activity during awakening time than older women, setting A3> A4 improves the accuracy of determining depression. do.
  • B3> B4 Since the value of HF ⁇ activity in the awakening time zone is more likely to be larger in young women than in older women, setting B3> B4 improves the accuracy of determining the depressed state.
  • At least one of the formulas (5) to (12) of the second group For each subject, in addition to at least one of the formulas (1) to (4) of the first group, at least one of the formulas (5) to (12) of the second group. If the magnitude relation of the expression is satisfied, it may be determined that the patient is depressed. By adding the conditions of the second group equations (5) to (12), it is possible to reduce the occurrence of erroneous determination that a healthy person is determined to be depressed.
  • the biological information of the subject in the awakening time zone is processed, but it is preferable to further process the biological information of the subject in the sleeping time zone.
  • the awakening time zone refers to the time zone in which the subject is awake, that is, awake.
  • the sleep time zone is a time zone in which the subject is sleeping, and refers to a time zone other than the awakening time zone.
  • the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone show various modes depending on the living environment and mental state of the subject, and the time length and the time zone are not particularly limited.
  • the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone may be classified by having the subject self-report the sleep start time and the awakening start time by a questionnaire to the subject, or an input means provided in the depression state determination system described later. May be done by.
  • known sleep state measurement methods described in JP-A-2010-179133 and JP-A-2009-297474 can also be applied.
  • the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone by measuring the acceleration associated with the posture of the subject and comparing the acceleration with a predetermined value. According to this classification method, the subject's self-report is not required, so that the subject's inspection burden is reduced. In addition, the occurrence of misclassification of the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone due to the subject's omission of declaration or error in the declaration is suppressed.
  • the acceleration in the height direction of the sleeping time zone is larger than the acceleration in the height direction of the awakening time zone.
  • the acceleration in the height direction is suitable for the classification of the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone because there is a difference between the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone. Therefore, it is preferable that the acceleration used for classifying the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone is the acceleration in the height direction accompanying the posture of the subject.
  • the height direction is the direction from the subject's feet to the head.
  • Examples of the classification of the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone using the acceleration in the height direction include the following first classification method, second classification method, and third classification method.
  • the first classification method is a method of classifying the time zone in which the formula (25) is satisfied into the sleep time zone and the time zone in which the formula (25) is not satisfied into the awakening time zone.
  • the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1 Is a negative acceleration T (unit: dimensionless quantity), and if the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject stands up is a negative value, the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T.
  • D1 is a constant (unit: dimensionless quantity).
  • D1 is preferably ⁇ 0.85, more preferably ⁇ 0.80, and even more preferably ⁇ 0.75.
  • the second classification method is a method in which the longest time zone among the time zones in which the formula (25) is satisfied is classified into the sleep time zone, and the time zones other than the sleep time zone are classified into the awakening time zone. Specifically, during the measurement unit time, the longest time zone in which the equation (25) is satisfied is classified into a sleep time zone, and the time zone other than the sleep time zone is classified into an awakening time zone.
  • the measurement unit time is the time length from the start of measurement to the end of measurement. In this method, the longest time zone in which the equation (25) is satisfied is classified into a sleep time zone. Therefore, at this time, the measurement unit time is within 24 hours so that at least one sleep time zone can be obtained in a day. Is the length of time.
  • the second classification method is effective for subjects who can sleep continuously without waking up at halfway time during sleep.
  • the third classification method is a method of classifying the time zone in which the formula (25) is satisfied continuously for a predetermined time or more into the sleep time zone, and classifying the time zone other than the sleep time zone into the awakening time zone.
  • the predetermined time is a time length set to consider the time zone estimated to be in the lying position other than the sleeping time as the awakening time zone.
  • the predetermined time can be set to, for example, 15 minutes or more, preferably 30 minutes or more, and more preferably 1 hour or more.
  • the third classification method since the actual sleep time zone is estimated by integrating the sleep time zones classified into small pieces, the patient suffering from insomnia of awakening during sleep occurs at halfway time. It is effective for the examiner.
  • the acceleration is a value after performing a morphology calculation on the acceleration-time waveform. Morphology operations are used in image processing for denoising. Therefore, if the value after performing the morphology calculation on the acceleration-time waveform is applied to the equation (25), the obtained acceleration is shorter than the total measurement time (for example, the total measurement time). Values that change within 1/150 hours of) are removed. Therefore, the entire contour of the acceleration-time waveform is extracted, and it becomes easy to classify the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone.
  • the acceleration-time waveform that has been binarized with the predetermined value D1 as the threshold value.
  • the acceleration is regarded as 0, and when the acceleration is less than the predetermined value D1, the acceleration is regarded as 1.
  • the morphology operation includes, for example, an expansion operation that performs a process of thickening a line, a contraction operation that performs a process of thinning a line, an opening process that performs an expansion operation after a contraction operation, and a closing process that performs a contraction operation after an expansion operation.
  • the morphology calculation is at least one of the opening process and the closing process performed in a predetermined time width. Further, it is more preferable to perform both the opening process and the closing process as the morphology operation.
  • the number of times the opening process and the closing process are performed is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to perform the opening process and the closing process once or more, and it is more preferable to perform the opening process and the closing process twice or more each.
  • the time width for performing the expansion calculation and the contraction calculation may be appropriately set.
  • the time width of the first opening process and the closing process is set to 2 minutes
  • the time width of the second opening process and the closing process is set to 2 minutes. It can be 5 minutes. It is preferable to increase the time width during processing each time the processing is repeated in this way. In this way, by gradually increasing the time width of the opening process and the closing process, it is possible to prevent the data of the acceleration that has changed in a short time compared to the total measurement time from being removed.
  • the method for determining depression is a calculation step for calculating the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and the value of the left side is the magnitude relation of the following formulas. It is preferable to include a determination step for determining whether or not the above is satisfied.
  • the calculation step it is preferable to calculate the left side of the formula of the first group and the left side of the formula of the second group and / or the formula of the third group, and the left side of the formula of the first group and the formula of the second group.
  • it is more preferable to calculate the left side of the formula of the third group and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the formula of the first group, the formula of the second group, and the formula of the third group.
  • the calculation step it is preferable to calculate the left side of the formulas (13) to (24) according to the gender and age of the subject.
  • For the left side of the equation in the third group for example, in the case of a man under the first predetermined age, calculate at least one of the left side of the equation (13), the equation (14), and the equation (15). It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the formula (13) and the formula (14), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the formula (13), the formula (14), and the formula (15). Further, in the case of a man of the first predetermined age or older, it is preferable to calculate at least one of the left side of the formula (16), the formula (17), and the formula (18), and the formula (16) and the formula (16).
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the beat interval / activity amount ⁇ A5 magnitude relationship of the formula (13) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the first male under a predetermined age.
  • A5 is preferably 46000 ms, more preferably 41000 ms, and even more preferably 36000 ms.
  • the equation (13) may be (beat interval / activity amount) / 100 ⁇ A51.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the magnitude relationship of HF / activity amount ⁇ B5 of the formula (14) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male under the first predetermined age.
  • B5 is preferably 26000 ms 2 , preferably 25,000 ms 2 . Is more preferable, 24000 ms 2 is more preferable, and 23000 ms 2 is most preferable.
  • B5 is preferably 625, more preferably 615. It is preferable, and it is more preferable that it is 605.
  • the unit of B5 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (14) may be (HF / activity amount) / 1000 ⁇ B51 in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state.
  • the discrimination step for a man under the first predetermined age, it is possible to determine whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount> C5 of the formula (15) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied.
  • the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.070, more preferably 0.075, and even more preferably 0.080.
  • the unit of C5 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (15) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100> C51.
  • C5 is It is preferably 0.015, more preferably 0.030, and even more preferably 0.045.
  • the unit of C5 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (15) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100> C51.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the beat interval / activity amount ⁇ A6 magnitude relationship of the formula (16) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male of the first predetermined age or older.
  • A6 is preferably 41000 ms, more preferably 39000 ms, and even more preferably 37,000 ms.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the magnitude relationship of HF / activity amount ⁇ B6 of the formula (17) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male of the first predetermined age or older.
  • B6 is preferably 18000 ms 2 , preferably 17,000 ms 2 . Is more preferable, 16000 ms 2 is even more preferable, and 15000 ms 2 is most preferable.
  • B6 is preferably 550, more preferably 540. It is preferably 530, and more preferably 530.
  • the unit of B6 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (17) may be (HF / activity amount) / 1000 ⁇ B61.
  • the discrimination step for a man of the first predetermined age or older, it is possible to determine whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount> C6 of the formula (18) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied.
  • the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.08, more preferably 0.09, and even more preferably 0.10.
  • the unit of C6 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (18) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100> C61.
  • C6 is It is preferably 0.056, more preferably 0.059, and even more preferably 0.062.
  • the unit of C6 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (18) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100> C61.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the beat interval / activity amount ⁇ A7 magnitude relationship of the formula (19) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the second female under a predetermined age.
  • A7 is preferably 61000 ms, more preferably 59000 ms, and even more preferably 57,000 ms.
  • the equation (19) may be (beat interval / activity amount) / 100 ⁇ A71.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the females under the second predetermined age satisfy the magnitude relationship of HF / activity amount ⁇ B7 of the formula (20) in the sleep time zone of the subject.
  • B7 is preferably 34000 ms 2 and 32000 ms 2 . Is more preferable, 30,000 ms 2 is even more preferable, and 28,000 ms 2 is most preferable.
  • B7 is preferably 650, more preferably 640. It is preferably 630, and even more preferably 630.
  • the unit of B7 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (20) may be (HF / activity amount) / 1000 ⁇ B71 in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state.
  • the discrimination step for a woman under the second predetermined age, it is possible to determine whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount> C7 of the formula (21) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied.
  • the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.03, more preferably 0.04, and even more preferably 0.05.
  • the unit of C7 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (21) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100> C71.
  • C7 is It is preferably 0.050, more preferably 0.053, and even more preferably 0.056.
  • the unit of C7 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (21) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100> C71.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the beat interval / activity amount ⁇ A8 magnitude relationship of the formula (22) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the female of the second predetermined age or older.
  • A8 is preferably 43000 ms, more preferably 41000 ms, and even more preferably 40,000 ms.
  • the equation (22) may be (beat interval / activity amount) / 100 ⁇ A81.
  • the discrimination step it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the female of the second predetermined age or older satisfies the magnitude relationship of HF / activity amount ⁇ B8 of the formula (23) in the sleep time zone of the subject.
  • B8 is preferably 20000 ms 2 , preferably 19000 ms 2 . Is more preferable, 18,000 ms 2 is even more preferable, and 17,000 ms 2 is most preferable.
  • B8 is preferably 550, more preferably 525. It is preferably 500, and even more preferably 500.
  • the unit of B8 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (23) may be (HF / activity amount) / 1000 ⁇ B81.
  • the discrimination step it is possible to determine whether or not the female of the second predetermined age or older satisfies the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount> C8 in the formula (24) in the sleep time zone of the subject.
  • the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz
  • the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.04, more preferably 0.05, and even more preferably 0.06.
  • the unit of C8 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (24) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100> C81.
  • C8 is It is preferably 0.049, more preferably 0.052, and even more preferably 0.055.
  • the unit of C8 is a dimensionless quantity.
  • the equation (24) may be (LF / HF) ⁇ activity amount ⁇ 100> C81.
  • A5 ⁇ A6 Since young men tend to have smaller beat intervals / activity values during sleep hours than older men, setting A5 ⁇ A6 improves the accuracy of determining depression.
  • A7> A8 Since young women are more likely to have a larger value of pulsation interval / activity during sleep time than older women, setting A7> A8 improves the accuracy of determining depression.
  • B5> B6 Since young men are more likely to have a larger HF / activity value during sleep than older men, setting B5> B6 improves the accuracy of determining depression.
  • B7> B8 Since young women are more likely to have a larger HF / activity value during sleep than older women, setting B7> B8 improves the accuracy of determining depression.
  • C5 ⁇ C6 Since younger men are more likely to have a smaller value of (LF / HF) x activity during sleep time than older men, setting C5 ⁇ C6 improves the accuracy of determining depression. do.
  • C7 ⁇ C8 Since young women tend to have a smaller value of (LF / HF) x activity during sleep time than older women, setting C7 ⁇ C8 improves the accuracy of determining depression. do.
  • the formulas (13) to (24) For each subject, in addition to at least one of the formulas (1) to (4) which are the formulas of the first group, the formulas (13) to (24) according to the gender and age of the third group. If the magnitude relation of at least one of the equations is satisfied, it may be determined that the patient is depressed. By adding the conditions of the above-mentioned third group equations (13) to (24), it is possible to reduce the occurrence of erroneous determination that a healthy person is determined to be in a depressed state. Further, for each subject, in addition to at least one of the formulas (1) to (4) which are the formulas of the first group, the formulas (5) to (12) according to the gender and age of the second group. ), And at least one of the formulas (13) to (24) according to the gender and age of the third group, it is determined to be depressed. You may.
  • the determination method for determining a depressed state may include a notification step for notifying the subject or the like of the determination result of the depressed state.
  • Examples of the notification method include voice, still image, and moving image.
  • the determination method for determining these depression states can be carried out using, for example, the depression state determination system described in detail below.
  • At least a part of each step of the above discrimination method may be executed by a subject, an operator, or the like, and it is preferable that the measurement step, the calculation step, and the discrimination step are executed by the following depression state determination system. It is more preferable that the measurement step, the calculation step, the discrimination step, and the notification step are executed by the following depression state determination system. All steps may be executed by the following depression state determination system.
  • the depression state determination system has a measuring unit that measures the beat interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity (hereinafter referred to as "activity amount") that accompanies the movement of the subject, and the beat.
  • the processing unit that calculates LF and HF by constant integration of the power spectrum obtained including the step of converting the interval to the frequency spectrum, and the left side of the following formula are calculated according to the gender and age of the subject, and the left side is calculated. It is provided with a determination unit for determining that the subject is in a depressed state when the value satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following equation.
  • the depression state determination system includes a measurement unit, a processing unit, and a determination unit.
  • the measuring unit is, for example, an electrocardiograph or heart rate sensor that measures the heartbeat of the subject, a pulse wave sensor that measures the pulse wave of the subject to obtain the pulse, and an acceleration that measures the activity amount of the subject.
  • a sensor an angular velocity sensor, or the like.
  • the processing unit performs frequency spectrum conversion based on the pulsation interval measured by the measurement unit, calculates the power spectrum integral value, and calculates the LF and HF used for determining the depression state.
  • the judgment unit creates judgment data according to the gender and age of the subject using the activity amount measured by the measurement unit and the LF and HF obtained by the processing unit, and constants C1 to C4 and the like. Depression is determined by comparing the predetermined value of the above with the determination data.
  • Examples of the device constituting the processing unit and the determination unit include an analyzer such as a computer or a measuring device equipped with software for creating determination data used for determining a depressed state and comparing a predetermined value with the determination data. ..
  • the determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and the subject is depressed when the value on the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula. It is preferable that it is controlled so as to determine.
  • the determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and the subject is depressed when the value on the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula. It is preferable that it is controlled so as to determine.
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 1 according to the first embodiment.
  • the depression state determination system 1 shown in FIG. 2 includes a sensor 10 constituting a measurement unit and an analyzer 50.
  • the sensor 10 includes a measurement unit 11 including a pulsation measurement unit 12 that detects a pulsation interval and an activity amount measurement unit 13 that detects an activity amount.
  • the sensor 10 is small and lightweight, and can be attached to the skin of the subject together with the main body in a state where the electrodes (not shown) on the back surface of the main body are in close contact with the chest of the subject. As a result, the sensor 10 is hidden under the clothes and becomes inconspicuous.
  • the depression state determination system preferably uses the RR interval (RRI), which is the interval between the R waves in the electrocardiographic signal, as the pulsation interval.
  • RRI RR interval
  • the pulsation measuring unit 12 measures the electrocardiographic signal with the electrodes in close contact with the chest of the subject, calculates the RRI based on the electrocardiographic signal, and transmits it to the analyzer 50. Although the pulsation measuring unit 12 of the sensor 10 calculates the RRI based on the electrocardiographic signal, the calculation of the RRI may be performed by the processing unit 51 described later.
  • the pulsation measuring unit 12 may measure the pulse wave instead of measuring the heart rate.
  • the pulse wave can be measured by irradiating a human fingertip, earlobe, or the like with near-infrared rays having a wavelength of 700 nm to 1200 nm, and measuring the amount of near-infrared rays reflected in contact or non-contact.
  • the pulse interval can be obtained from the interval between adjacent peaks of the pulse wave measured in this way.
  • the activity measuring unit 13 of the measuring unit 11 measures, for example, the acceleration in the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions of the subject and transmits it to the analyzer 50.
  • the type of the sensor that measures the acceleration is not particularly limited, and for example, a piezo resistor type acceleration sensor, a piezoelectric type acceleration sensor, a capacitance type acceleration sensor, or the like can be used. Since the piezo resistor type accelerometer uses a semiconductor, it is small and easy to mass-produce. Piezoelectric accelerometers are easy to detect relatively high acceleration. Capacitive accelerometers are more sensitive than piezo-resistor accelerometers, have a wider range of detectable accelerations, and are less temperature dependent.
  • Angular velocity may be detected instead of acceleration as the amount of activity.
  • the type of the sensor for measuring the angular velocity is not particularly limited, and for example, a rotary type, a vibration type, a gas type, an optical fiber type, and a ring laser type angular velocity sensor can be used.
  • wireless communication may be used or wired communication may be used.
  • the acceleration which is the amount of activity, is transmitted and received at the same timing as the RRI.
  • the senor automatically turns off after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on.
  • the predetermined time may be set in consideration of the number of data required for determining the depression state, and may be set to, for example, 24 hours or 48 hours.
  • the analyzer 50 includes a processing unit 51 and a determination unit 81, and the processing unit 51 includes a receiving unit 52, a frequency spectrum conversion unit 55, and a power spectrum integration calculation unit 56.
  • the receiving unit 52 receives the RRI and the activity amount transmitted from the sensor 10.
  • the frequency spectrum conversion unit 55 converts the RRI, which is a time signal transmitted from the reception unit 52, into a frequency spectrum by using a frequency spectrum conversion method such as FFT.
  • the power spectrum integration calculation unit 56 calculates the power spectrum from the spectrum obtained by the frequency spectrum conversion unit 55 and performs integration in a predetermined frequency range to obtain LF and HF. Specifically, the following processing is performed. First, when the power spectrum is calculated from the frequency spectrum obtained by the frequency spectrum conversion unit 55, a power spectrum density is obtained on the vertical axis and a frequency distribution map is obtained on the horizontal axis. Next, LF and HF are obtained by integrating the power spectra in the range of Lf1 to Lf2 and the range of Hf1 to Hf2, respectively.
  • Lf1 ⁇ Hf1 and Lf2 ⁇ Hf2 are preferable.
  • the specific calculation method of the power spectrum is as described in "1. Discrimination method for determining a depressed state", and even if the first power spectrum F 2 is used as the power spectrum, for example. Often, the second power spectrum F may be used.
  • the determination unit 81 of the depression state determination system includes a determination data creation unit 82, a predetermined value storage unit 83, and a comparison unit 84.
  • the determination data creation unit 82 determines the determination data required for calculating the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) used for determining the depressed state according to the gender and age of the subject.
  • the activity amount is transmitted from the receiving unit 52 of the processing unit 51, and the HF and LF are transmitted from the power spectrum integration calculation unit 56 of the processing unit 51 to the determination data creating unit 82 of the determination unit 81. By multiplying and dividing these data, the determination data described on the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) is created.
  • the determination data creation unit 82 acquires the gender and age from, for example, an input unit described later, selects the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) according to the gender and age, and selects the left side of the equation (1) to the equation (4). The value of can be calculated.
  • the RRI or the like is transmitted from the receiving unit 52 of the processing unit 51 to the determination data creating unit 82 of the determination unit 81.
  • the predetermined value storage unit 83 stores predetermined values such as constants C1 to C4 described on the right side of the equations (1) to (4) used for determining the depression state. It is preferable that the predetermined value storage unit 83 is controlled so that the predetermined value can be appropriately changed for each gender and age of the subject. For example, it is more preferable that the predetermined value storage unit 83 acquires a predetermined value according to gender and age from, for example, an input unit described later.
  • the determination data created by the determination data creation unit 82 (for example, the data on the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4)) and the predetermined value storage unit 83 are stored. Substituting a predetermined value (for example, the data on the right side of any one of the equations (1) to (4)) into the equation, comparing the magnitude of the left side and the right side, and determining whether the magnitude relation of the equation is satisfied. do. If the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it is determined to be depressed, and if not satisfied, it is determined not to be depressed.
  • the analyzer 50 has an input unit for inputting the gender, age, predetermined value, etc. of the subject.
  • the determination data creation unit 82 can select the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) according to the gender and age, and calculate the value on the left side.
  • the predetermined value storage unit 83 can acquire a predetermined value according to gender and age from, for example, an input unit described later. Examples of the input unit include buttons, a touch panel, a keyboard, and the like.
  • the analyzer 50 has a notification unit 91 that notifies the subject or the like of the determination result of the depressed state from the determination unit 81.
  • the notification method is not particularly limited, such as voice, still image, and moving image. It is also possible to change the content of the notification according to the level of expertise of the person to be notified, such as a specialist such as a doctor or counselor, the subject or his / her family.
  • a specialist such as a doctor or counselor
  • the notification unit 91 is provided in the depression state determination system 1 is shown, but even if the determination result is transmitted to a notification device different from the depression state determination system 1 and the result is notified to the subject or the like. good.
  • the notification device include an external monitor, a mobile phone, a smartphone, a tablet terminal, a speaker, an earphone, and the like.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 2 according to the second embodiment.
  • the depression state determination system 2 shown in FIG. 3 includes a sensor 10 and an analyzer 60.
  • the same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the analyzer 60 includes a processing unit 61 and a determination unit 81, and the processing unit 61 includes a receiving unit 62, an outlier detection unit 63, an outlier removal unit 64, a frequency spectrum conversion unit 65, and a power spectrum integration calculation unit 66. include.
  • the outlier detection unit 63 determines whether or not the RRI and activity amount output from the reception unit 62 should be regarded as outliers. Whether or not RRI should be regarded as an outlier is determined as follows. In the second embodiment, the reciprocal of RRI (in seconds) is multiplied by 60 to calculate the instantaneous heart rate, and the absolute value of the difference from the instantaneous heart rate one beat before is the first predetermined number (the present embodiment). Then, the average at the most recent plurality of points (in the present embodiment, "8 points"), which is "18" or less) or less, is calculated.
  • the RRI to be evaluated is determined.
  • the first predetermined number is preferably 30, more preferably 20, and even more preferably 15.
  • the second predetermined number is preferably 50, more preferably 40, and even more preferably 30.
  • the first predetermined number, the second predetermined number, and the number of the latest plurality of points may be appropriately changed according to individual differences and the like.
  • the first predetermined number may be 30 or less
  • the second predetermined number may be 30 or more
  • the number of the latest plurality of points may be appropriately changed within the range of 4 to 20.
  • the amount of activity may be regarded as an abnormal value when the amount of activity is a negative value.
  • the outlier removing unit 64 excludes the RRI regarded as an outlier by the outlier detecting unit 63 from the data processing target in the frequency spectrum conversion unit 65. Further, the outlier removing unit 64 excludes the RRI and the activity amount regarded as outliers by the outlier detecting unit 63 from the data processing targets in the determination data creating unit 82.
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 3 according to the third embodiment.
  • the depression state determination system 3 shown in FIG. 4 includes a sensor 20 and an analyzer 50.
  • the same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the measurement unit 21 of the sensor 20 is provided with an input means 24 for inputting a wakefulness state or a sleep state in addition to the pulsation measurement unit 22 and the activity amount measurement unit 23.
  • the subject can obtain the awakening information and the sleep information by operating the input means 24 by himself / herself at the start of the awakening time zone and the start of the sleeping time zone.
  • the input means 24 is, for example, a switch provided on the surface of the sensor, and the switch may be a button type or a lever type, and the method is not particularly limited.
  • the input means 24 is provided in the analyzer 50 instead of the sensor 20 of the depression state determination system 3. This makes it possible to prevent the subject from unknowingly operating the input means 24 due to turning over during sleep or the like, as compared with the case where the input means 24 is provided in the sensor 20.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 4 according to the fourth embodiment.
  • the depression state determination system 4 shown in FIG. 5 includes a sensor 30 and an analyzer 50.
  • the same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the measurement unit 31 of the sensor 30 is provided with a body temperature measuring unit serving as a body temperature measuring unit 34 in addition to the pulsation measuring unit 32 and the activity amount measuring unit 33.
  • a body temperature measuring unit serving as a body temperature measuring unit 34 in addition to the pulsation measuring unit 32 and the activity amount measuring unit 33.
  • body temperature is measured in the deep part of the body, such as the oral cavity, axilla, and eardrum, where the influence of environmental temperature is small. Therefore, it is difficult to directly measure the core body temperature. Therefore, the body temperature here includes not only the core body temperature but also the body surface temperature. It is also possible to measure the temperature of a member constituting the measuring unit, for example, the substrate of a sensor, without directly measuring the body temperature. Since the substrate temperature of the sensor also rises as the body temperature of the subject rises, it is possible to measure the relative change in body temperature by measuring the substrate temperature of the sensor.
  • the type of body temperature measuring means is not particularly limited as long as it is a temperature sensor, and for example, metal resistance temperature detectors such as platinum, nickel, and copper, thermocouples, thermistors, IC temperature sensors, crystal thermometers, and the like can be used. ..
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 5 according to the fifth embodiment.
  • the depression state determination system 5 shown in FIG. 6 includes a sensor 40 and an analyzer 70.
  • the same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • the senor 40 is provided with a data storage unit 44 that temporarily stores biometric information acquired by the measurement unit 41 including the pulsation measurement unit 42 and the activity amount measurement unit 43. Since it is not necessary to sequentially transmit the data acquired by the sensor 40 to the analyzer 70 to process the data, it is possible to suppress the amount of power consumed by the data communication. For example, it is suitable for a case where a subject makes a measurement at home using a sensor and later determines whether or not the doctor is depressed by using an analyzer in a medical institution.
  • the processing unit 71 of the analyzer 70 reads out the RRI data stored in the data storage unit 44 in order to perform frequency spectrum conversion and power spectrum integration.
  • the determination unit 81 determines the depression state using the RRI and activity data read from the data storage unit 44 and the LF and HF calculated by the frequency spectrum conversion unit 75 and the power spectrum integration calculation unit 76.
  • FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 6 according to the sixth embodiment.
  • the depression state determination system 6 shown in FIG. 7 includes a sensor 10 and an analyzer 100.
  • the same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
  • any one of the X, Y, and Z axes coincides with the acceleration in the height direction. This is to classify the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone using the value of the acceleration in the height direction.
  • the analyzer 100 includes a processing unit 101 and a determination unit 81, and the processing unit 101 includes a receiving unit 102, a frequency spectrum conversion unit 105, a power spectrum integration calculation unit 106, and a morphology calculation unit 107.
  • the morphology calculation unit 107 performs a morphology calculation on the negative acceleration-time waveform in order to remove the noise of the negative acceleration-time waveform output from the reception unit 102.
  • a morphology operation as described above, for example, an expansion operation, a contraction operation, an opening process, a closing process, and a combination thereof can be applied.
  • the processing unit 101 is binarized to binarize the magnitude of the negative acceleration value with the predetermined value D1 as the threshold value before the processing by the morphology calculation unit 107.
  • a processing unit can also be provided.
  • the negative acceleration T is D1 or more
  • the negative acceleration T is regarded as 0, and if the negative acceleration T is less than D1, it is regarded as 1.
  • the value of the predetermined value D1 is not particularly limited, but is preferably -0.85 g, more preferably -0.8 g, and even more preferably -0.75 g (where the unit g is gravity). Represents the magnitude of acceleration).
  • the determination unit 81 compares the value of the negative acceleration T processed by the morphology calculation unit 107 of the processing unit 101 with the predetermined value D1, classifies the time zone in which the equation (25) is satisfied into the sleep time zone, and formulates the equation. The time zone in which (25) is not satisfied is classified into the awakening time zone. T ⁇ D1 ... (25) However, D1 is a constant.
  • the explanation was made using the first classification method for classifying the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone simply by using the formula (25), but as described above, the longest time zone in which the formula (25) is satisfied.
  • a method of classifying the time zone into a sleep time zone and classifying the time zone other than the sleep time zone into an awakening time zone (second classification method), or a time zone in which the equation (25) is continuously satisfied for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to use a method of classifying into a sleeping time zone and classifying other than the sleeping time zone into an awakening time zone (third classification method).
  • the processing unit, determination unit, and notification unit are preferably unit of the analyzer, but at least one of them may be the unit of the other device.
  • Each part includes a central processing unit (CPU), a processor such as a microprocessor (MPU), a storage medium such as RAM (RandomAccessMemory) and ROM (ReadOnlyMemory), FPGA (FieldProgrammableGateArray), and LSI (LargeScaleIntegration). ), ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), etc.
  • Logic circuit It may be composed of a part or all of these.
  • the analyzer may have an auxiliary storage device such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) or a flash memory, or a portable recording medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD disk, or a USB memory.
  • Embodiment 1 The depressive state of Embodiment 1 with 84 healthy subjects who did not go to a psychiatric medical institution and 57 patients who were diagnosed by a doctor as a patient with bipolar disorder or major depression and went to a medical institution. The usefulness of the determination system 1 was verified.
  • the subjects were divided into healthy subjects and patients, further divided into males and females, and further divided into those under 35 years old and those over 35 years old, and finally 8 groups (MP1 group, MP2 group, FP1 group) as shown in Tables 1 and 2.
  • 8 groups MP1 group, MP2 group, FP1 group
  • each subject was made to wear a small electrocardiograph of the depression state determination system 1 for 48 hours, and RRI (unit: ms) and activity amount (acceleration) (unit:) in the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone. Dimensionless quantity) was measured.
  • LF and HF (unit: ms 2 ) are obtained by frequency spectrum conversion of RRI measured by an electrocardiograph and power spectrum integration for the obtained first power spectrum F 2 (unit: ms 2 / Hz). Calculated. Then, whether the obtained RRI, activity amount, LF and HF / LF values are applied to the formulas (1) to (4) of the discrimination method for determining the depressed state to satisfy each formula. Determined.
  • the first classification method was used for the classification of the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone, and the constant D1 was set to ⁇ 0.75.
  • the depression state determination system 1 is the above-mentioned first group equations (1) to (4). ) Was determined to satisfy any of the above. That is, the correct judgment rate for discriminating a patient suffering from bipolar disorder or major depression as a depressed state was calculated. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • the depression state determination system 1 is the formula of the first group and the formula of the second group, or the formula of the first group and the third group.
  • the proportion of subjects who were determined to satisfy the group formula was calculated.
  • the formulas (5) to (12) of the second group, or the third formula in addition to the formulas (1) to (4) of the first group, the formulas (5) to (12) of the second group, or the third formula.
  • 1 to 6 Depression state determination system 10, 20, 30, 40: Sensor 11, 21, 31, 41: Measurement unit 12, 22, 32, 42: Pulsation measurement unit 13, 23, 33, 43: Activity measurement Unit 24: Input means, 34: Body temperature measurement unit, 44: Data storage unit 50, 60, 70, 100: Analyzer 51, 61, 71, 101: Processing unit 52, 62, 102: Receiver unit 55, 65, 75 , 105: Frequency spectrum conversion unit 56, 66, 76, 106: Power spectrum integration calculation unit 63: Outlier detection unit, 64: Outlier removal unit 81: Judgment unit, 82: Judgment data creation unit, 83: Predetermined value storage unit, 84: Comparison unit 91: Notification unit 107: Morphology calculation unit

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Dentistry (AREA)
  • Measurement Of The Respiration, Hearing Ability, Form, And Blood Characteristics Of Living Organisms (AREA)
  • Measuring Pulse, Heart Rate, Blood Pressure Or Blood Flow (AREA)

Abstract

Provided are: a discrimination method for determining a depressive state in accordance with the age and sex of a test subject; and a system therefor.　In order to determine a depressive state of a test subject, the discrimination method comprises: a measurement step for measuring the pulsation interval of the test subject and the amount of activity associated with the motion of the test subject and represented by an acceleration rate or an angular velocity; a calculation step for calculating the left sides of the following formulas; and a discrimination step for discriminating whether or not the values of the left sides satisfy the magnitude relationship of the respective formulas. [I] Male younger than first predetermined age During waking hours of test subject Formula (1): (LF/HF)/amount of activity>C1 [II] Male at first predetermined age or older During waking hours of test subject Formula (2): (LF/HF)×amount of activity<C2 [III] Female younger than second predetermined age During waking hours of test subject Formula (3): (LF/HF)/amount of activity>C3 [IV] Female at second predetermined age or older During waking hours of test subject Formula (4): (LF/HF)×amount of activity<C4

Description

うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法、及びうつ状態判定システムDepression method for determining depression and depression determination system
　本発明は、うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法、及びうつ状態判定システムに関する。 The present invention relates to a determination method for determining a depressed state and a depressed state determination system.
　近年では、うつ病等の精神疾患の患者が増えているため、うつ状態であると判定するための方法や、装置の開発の要求が高まっている。例えば、特許文献１では、被検者の覚醒時間帯において、拍動間隔、活動量を計測し、拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換して得られたパワースペクトルを周波数Ｌｆ１からＬｆ２まで定積分した値（ＬＦ）と、周波数Ｈｆ１からＨｆ２まで定積分した値（ＨＦ）とを算出して、（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量が所定の値（定数Ｃ３）より大きくなる場合に、うつ状態であると判定する方法、装置が開示されている。 In recent years, the number of patients with mental illness such as depression is increasing, so there is an increasing demand for the development of methods and devices for determining depression. For example, in Patent Document 1, in the awakening time zone of the subject, the beat interval and the amount of activity are measured, and the power spectrum obtained by converting the beat interval into a frequency spectrum is definitely integrated from the frequencies Lf1 to Lf2. (LF) and a value (HF) that is a constant integral from frequencies Hf1 to Hf2 are calculated, and when (LF / HF) / activity amount becomes larger than a predetermined value (constant C3), it is considered to be in a depressed state. The determination method and the apparatus are disclosed.
国際公開第２０１６／０３１６５０号International Publication No. 2016/031650
　特許文献１に開示されているように、うつ状態の判定方法等については知られていたが、これまでに被験者の年齢や性別に応じた判定方法は知られていなかった。本発明は上記事情に鑑みてなされたものであり、その目的は、被験者の年齢、性別に応じてうつ状態であると判定するための判別方法、及びうつ状態判定システムを提供することを目的とする。 As disclosed in Patent Document 1, the method for determining the depressed state was known, but the method for determining the depressive state according to the age and gender of the subject was not known so far. The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a determination method for determining depression according to the age and gender of a subject, and a depression determination system. do.
　上記課題を解決することのできた本発明の実施の形態に係るうつ状態であると判定するための判別方法は下記［１］の通りである。
［１］被検者がうつ状態であると判定するために、前記被検者の拍動間隔と、前記被検者の動きに伴う加速度または角速度（以下、「活動量」と記載する）とを計測する計測ステップ、前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び前記左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含む判別方法。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ１　・・・（１）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ２　・・・（２）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ３　・・・（３）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ４　・・・（４）
　但し、前記第１の所定年齢と前記第２の所定年齢は、それぞれ３３歳～３７歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であり、ＬＦ、ＨＦは、拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換するステップを含んで得たパワースペクトルを定積分して得た値であり、Ｃ１～Ｃ４は定数である。 The determination method for determining a depressed state according to the embodiment of the present invention that has been able to solve the above problems is as follows [1].
[1] In order to determine that the subject is in a depressed state, the beat interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity (hereinafter referred to as "activity amount") accompanying the movement of the subject. A measurement step for measuring the above, a calculation step for calculating the left side of the following formula according to the gender and age of the subject, and a determination step for determining whether or not the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula. Discrimination method including.
[I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
(LF / HF) / Activity> C1 ・ ・ ・ (1)
[II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
(LF / HF) x activity amount <C2 ... (2)
[III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
(LF / HF) / Activity> C3 ・ ・ ・ (3)
[IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
(LF / HF) x activity amount <C4 ... (4)
However, the first predetermined age and the second predetermined age are each one of 33 to 37 years old, and LF and HF include a step of frequency spectrum conversion of the beat interval. It is a value obtained by definitely integrating the obtained power spectrum, and C1 to C4 are constants.
　上記構成により、被験者の年齢、性別に応じてうつ状態であると判定するための判別方法を提供することができる。判別方法の好ましい態様は、下記［２］～［１３］、［１ａ］～［１ｄ］、［３ａ］、［３ｂ］、［５ａ］、［５ｂ］の通りである。
［２］Ｃ１＞Ｃ３、Ｃ２＞Ｃ４である［１］に記載の判別方法。
［３］前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び前記左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含む［１］または［２］に記載の判別方法。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ１　　　　・・・（５）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ１　　　　　　・・・（６）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ２　　　　・・・（７）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ２　　　　　　・・・（８）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ３　　　　・・・（９）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ３　　　　　　・・・（１０）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ４　　　　・・・（１１）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ４　　　　　　・・・（１２）
　但し、Ａ１～Ａ４、Ｂ１～Ｂ４は定数である。
［４］Ａ１＞Ａ２、Ａ３＞Ａ４、Ｂ１＞Ｂ２、Ｂ３＞Ｂ４である［３］に記載の判別方法。
［５］前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び前記左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含む［１］～［４］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ５　　　　・・・（１３）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ５　　　　　　・・・（１４）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ５　・・・（１５）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ６　　　　・・・（１６）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ６　　　　　　・・・（１７）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ６　・・・（１８）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ７　　　　・・・（１９）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ７　　　　　　・・・（２０）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ７　・・・（２１）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ８　　　　・・・（２２）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ８　　　　　　・・・（２３）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ８　・・・（２４）
　但し、Ａ５～Ａ８、Ｂ５～Ｂ８、Ｃ５～Ｃ８は定数である。
［６］Ａ５＜Ａ６、Ａ７＞Ａ８、Ｂ５＞Ｂ６、Ｂ７＞Ｂ８、Ｃ５＜Ｃ６、Ｃ７＜Ｃ８である［５］に記載の判別方法。
［７］前記覚醒時間帯および前記睡眠時間帯として、被検者の姿勢に伴う加速度を計測し、該加速度と所定値を比較することによって分類された覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を用いる［５］または［６］に記載の判別方法。
［８］前記加速度は、被検者の姿勢に伴う身長方向の加速度である［１］～［７］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［９］前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が正の値の場合は、前記身長方向の加速度に－１を乗算した値を負加速度Ｔとし、前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が負の値の場合は、前記負の値を負加速度Ｔとし、下記（２５）式が満足される時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、下記（２５）式が満足されない時間帯を覚醒時間帯に分類する［８］に記載の判別方法。
　負加速度Ｔ≧Ｄ１・・・（２５）
　但し、Ｄ１は定数である。
［１０］前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が正の値の場合は、前記身長方向の加速度に－１を乗算した値を負加速度Ｔとし、前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が負の値の場合は、前記負の値を負加速度Ｔとし、下記（２５）式が満足される時間帯のうち最長の時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する［８］に記載の判別方法。
　負加速度Ｔ≧Ｄ１・・・（２５）
　但し、Ｄ１は定数である。
［１１］前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が正の値の場合は、前記身長方向の加速度に－１を乗算した値を負加速度Ｔとし、前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が負の値の場合は、前記負の値を負加速度Ｔとし、所定時間以上連続して下記（２５）式が満足される時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する［８］に記載の判別方法。
　負加速度Ｔ≧Ｄ１・・・（２５）
　但し、Ｄ１は定数である。
［１２］前記加速度は、加速度－時間波形に対してモルフォロジー演算を行った後の値である［１］～［１１］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［１３］前記モルフォロジー演算が、所定の時間幅で行われるオープニング処理とクロージング処理の少なくともいずれか一方である［１２］に記載の判別方法。
［１ａ］前記第１の所定年齢が３４歳、３５歳、または３６歳であり、前記第２の所定年齢が３４歳、３５歳、または３６歳である［１］～［１３］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［１ｂ］前記第１の所定年齢が３５歳であり、前記第２の所定年齢が３５歳である［１］～［１３］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［１ｃ］Ｃ１は５～１５であり、Ｃ２は０．５～０．９であり、Ｃ３は１０～１４であり、Ｃ４は０．４５～０．５５である［１］～［１３］、［１ａ］、［１ｂ］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［１ｄ］Ｃ１は１５であり、Ｃ２は０．５であり、Ｃ３は１４であり、Ｃ４は０．４５である［１］～［１３］、［１ａ］、［１ｂ］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［３ａ］Ａ１は１６０～１８０、Ｂ１は８０～１００、Ａ２は１３０～１５０、Ｂ２は７０～９０、Ａ３は１６０～１８０、Ｂ３は５５～６５、Ａ４は１４５～１６５、Ｂ４は５０～６０である［３］～［１３］、［１ａ］～［１ｄ］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［３ｂ］Ａ１は１６０、Ｂ１は８０、Ａ２は１３０、Ｂ２は７０、Ａ３は１６０、Ｂ３は５５、Ａ４は１４５、Ｂ４は５０である［３］～［１３］、［１ａ］～［１ｄ］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［５ａ］Ａ５は３６０００～４６０００、Ｂ５は２３０００～２６０００、Ｃ５は０．０７０～０．０８０、Ａ６は３７０００～４１０００、Ｂ６は１５０００～１８０００、Ｃ６は０．０８～０．１０、Ａ７は５７０００～６１０００、Ｂ７は２８０００～３４０００、Ｃ７は０．０３～０．０５、Ａ８は４００００～４３０００、Ｂ８は１７０００～２００００、Ｃ８は０．０４～０．０６である［５］～［１３］、［１ａ］～［１ｄ］、［３ａ］、［３ｂ］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
［５ｂ］Ａ５は３６０００、Ｂ５は２３０００、Ｃ５は０．０８０、Ａ６は３７０００、Ｂ６は１５０００、Ｃ６は０．１０、Ａ７は５７０００、Ｂ７は２８０００、Ｃ７は０．０５、Ａ８は４００００、Ｂ８は１７０００、Ｃ８は０．０６である［５］～［１３］、［１ａ］～［１ｄ］、［３ａ］、［３ｂ］のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。 With the above configuration, it is possible to provide a discrimination method for determining that the subject is depressed according to the age and gender of the subject. Preferred embodiments of the discrimination method are as follows [2] to [13], [1a] to [1d], [3a], [3b], [5a], and [5b].
[2] The discrimination method according to [1], wherein C1> C3 and C2> C4.
[3] It is determined whether or not the calculation step of calculating the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject and the value of the left side satisfy the magnitude relationship of the following formula. The discrimination method according to [1] or [2], which includes the discrimination step to be performed.
[I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
Beat interval x activity <A1 ... (5)
HF x activity amount <B1 ... (6)
[II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
Beat interval x activity <A2 ・ ・ ・ (7)
HF x activity amount <B2 ... (8)
[III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
Beat interval x activity <A3 ・ ・ ・ (9)
HF x activity amount <B3 ... (10)
[IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
Beat interval x activity <A4 ・ ・ ・ (11)
HF x activity amount <B4 ... (12)
However, A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 are constants.
[4] The discrimination method according to [3], wherein A1> A2, A3> A4, B1> B2, and B3> B4.
[5] It is determined whether or not the calculation step of calculating the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject and the value of the left side satisfy the magnitude relationship of the following formula. The discrimination method according to any one of [1] to [4], which includes the discrimination step to be performed.
[I] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A5 ・ ・ ・ (13)
HF / activity amount <B5 ... (14)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C5 ... (15)
[II] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject over the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A6 ・ ・ ・ (16)
HF / activity amount <B6 ... (17)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C6 ... (18)
[III] In the sleeping hours of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A7 ・ ・ ・ (19)
HF / activity amount <B7 ... (20)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C7 ... (21)
[IV] In the sleeping hours of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A8 ・ ・ ・ (22)
HF / activity amount <B8 ... (23)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C8 ... (24)
However, A5 to A8, B5 to B8, and C5 to C8 are constants.
[6] The discrimination method according to [5], wherein A5 <A6, A7> A8, B5> B6, B7> B8, C5 <C6, C7 <C8.
[7] As the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone, the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone classified by measuring the acceleration associated with the posture of the subject and comparing the acceleration with a predetermined value are used [5]. ] Or [6].
[8] The discrimination method according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the acceleration is an acceleration in the height direction accompanying the posture of the subject.
[9] When the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject stands up is a positive value, the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1 is defined as the negative acceleration T, and the subject's acceleration is defined as the negative acceleration T. When the acceleration in the height direction measured at the time of standing is a negative value, the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T, and the time zone in which the following equation (25) is satisfied is classified into the sleep time zone, and the following ( 25) The discrimination method according to [8], which classifies a time zone in which the equation is not satisfied into an awakening time zone.
Negative acceleration T ≧ D1 ... (25)
However, D1 is a constant.
[10] When the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject stands up is a positive value, the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1 is defined as the negative acceleration T, and the subject's acceleration is defined as a negative acceleration T. If the acceleration in the height direction measured during standing is a negative value, the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T, and the longest time zone in which the following equation (25) is satisfied is the sleep time zone. The discrimination method according to [8], which classifies the group into awakening time zone other than the sleeping time zone.
Negative acceleration T ≧ D1 ... (25)
However, D1 is a constant.
[11] When the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject stands up is a positive value, the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1 is defined as the negative acceleration T, and the subject's acceleration is defined as a negative acceleration T. When the acceleration in the height direction measured at the time of standing is a negative value, the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T, and the time zone in which the following equation (25) is satisfied continuously for a predetermined time or longer is the sleep time zone. The discrimination method according to [8], which classifies the person into awakening time zone other than the sleeping time zone.
Negative acceleration T ≧ D1 ... (25)
However, D1 is a constant.
[12] The discrimination method according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the acceleration is a value after performing a morphology calculation on an acceleration-time waveform.
[13] The determination method according to [12], wherein the morphology calculation is at least one of an opening process and a closing process performed in a predetermined time width.
[1a] Any of [1] to [13], wherein the first predetermined age is 34, 35, or 36 years old, and the second predetermined age is 34, 35, or 36 years old. The discrimination method described in item 1.
[1b] The discrimination method according to any one of [1] to [13], wherein the first predetermined age is 35 years old and the second predetermined age is 35 years old.
[1c] C1 is 5 to 15, C2 is 0.5 to 0.9, C3 is 10 to 14, and C4 is 0.45 to 0.55 [1] to [13]. The determination method according to any one of [1a] and [1b].
[1d] C1 is 15, C2 is 0.5, C3 is 14, and C4 is 0.45. Any one of [1] to [13], [1a], and [1b]. The discrimination method described in.
[3a] A1 is 160 to 180, B1 is 80 to 100, A2 is 130 to 150, B2 is 70 to 90, A3 is 160 to 180, B3 is 55 to 65, A4 is 145 to 165, and B4 is 50 to 60. The determination method according to any one of [3] to [13] and [1a] to [1d].
[3b] A1 is 160, B1 is 80, A2 is 130, B2 is 70, A3 is 160, B3 is 55, A4 is 145, and B4 is 50 [3] to [13], [1a] to [1d]. ] The determination method according to any one of the items.
[5a] A5 is 36000 to 46000, B5 is 23000 to 26000, C5 is 0.070 to 0.080, A6 is 37000 to 41000, B6 is 15000 to 18000, C6 is 0.08 to 0.10, and A7 is 57000. ~ 61000, B7 is 28,000 to 34,000, C7 is 0.03 to 0.05, A8 is 40,000 to 43,000, B8 is 17,000 to 20,000, and C8 is 0.04 to 0.06 [5] to [13], The determination method according to any one of [1a] to [1d], [3a], and [3b].
[5b] A5 is 36000, B5 is 23000, C5 is 0.080, A6 is 37000, B6 is 15000, C6 is 0.10, A7 is 57000, B7 is 28000, C7 is 0.05, A8 is 40,000, B8. Is 17000, and C8 is 0.06. The discrimination method according to any one of [5] to [13], [1a] to [1d], [3a], and [3b].
　上記課題を解決することのできた本発明の実施の形態に係るうつ状態判定システムは、下記［１４］の通りであり、好ましい態様は下記［１５］～［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｅ］、［１５ａ］～［１５ｃ］、［１６ａ］～［１６ｃ］の通りである。
［１４］被検者の拍動間隔と、被検者の動きに伴う加速度または角速度（以下、「活動量」と記載する）とを計測する計測部と、前記拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換するステップを含んで得たパワースペクトルを定積分して、ＬＦおよびＨＦを算出する処理部と、前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式の左辺を計算し、前記左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に前記被検者がうつ状態であると判定する判定部と、を備えることを特徴とするうつ状態判定システム。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ１　・・・（１）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ２　・・・（２）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ３　・・・（３）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ４　・・・（４）
　但し、前記第１の所定年齢と前記第２の所定年齢は、それぞれ３３歳～３７歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であり、Ｃ１～Ｃ４は定数である。
［１５］前記判定部は、前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算し、前記左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に前記被検者がうつ状態であると判定するように制御されている［１４］に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ１　　　　・・・（５）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ１　　　　　　・・・（６）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ２　　　　・・・（７）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ２　　　　　　・・・（８）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ３　　　　・・・（９）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ３　　　　　　・・・（１０）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ４　　　　・・・（１１）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ４　　　　　　・・・（１２）
　但し、Ａ１～Ａ４、Ｂ１～Ｂ４は定数である。
［１６］前記判定部は、前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算し、前記左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に前記被検者がうつ状態であると判定するように制御されている［１４］または［１５］に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ５　　　　・・・（１３）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ５　　　　　　・・・（１４）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ５　・・・（１５）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ６　　　　・・・（１６）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ６　　　　　　・・・（１７）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ６　・・・（１８）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ７　　　　・・・（１９）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ７　　　　　　・・・（２０）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ７　・・・（２１）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ８　　　　・・・（２２）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ８　　　　　　・・・（２３）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ８　・・・（２４）
　但し、Ａ５～Ａ８、Ｂ５～Ｂ８、Ｃ５～Ｃ８は定数である。
［１７］前記拍動間隔として、心電信号におけるＲ波とＲ波との間隔であるＲＲ間隔を用いる［１４］～［１６］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１４ａ］前記第１の所定年齢が３４歳、３５歳、または３６歳であり、前記第２の所定年齢が３４歳、３５歳、または３６歳である［１４］～［１７］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１４ｂ］前記第１の所定年齢が３５歳であり、前記第２の所定年齢が３５歳である［１４］～［１７］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１４ｃ］Ｃ１＞Ｃ３、Ｃ２＞Ｃ４である［１４］～［１７］、［１４ａ］、［１４ｂ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１４ｄ］Ｃ１は５～１５であり、Ｃ２は０．５～０．９であり、Ｃ３は１０～１４であり、Ｃ４は０．４５～０．５５である［１４］～［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｃ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１４ｅ］Ｃ１は１５であり、Ｃ２は０．５であり、Ｃ３は１４であり、Ｃ４は０．４５である［１４］～［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｃ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１５ａ］Ａ１＞Ａ２、Ａ３＞Ａ４、Ｂ１＞Ｂ２、Ｂ３＞Ｂ４である［１５］～［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｅ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１５ｂ］Ａ１は１６０～１８０、Ｂ１は８０～１００、Ａ２は１３０～１５０、Ｂ２は７０～９０、Ａ３は１６０～１８０、Ｂ３は５５～６５、Ａ４は１４５～１６５、Ｂ４は５０～６０である［１５］～［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｅ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１５ｃ］Ａ１は１６０、Ｂ１は８０、Ａ２は１３０、Ｂ２は７０、Ａ３は１６０、Ｂ３は５５、Ａ４は１４５、Ｂ４は５０である［１５］～［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｅ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１６ａ］Ａ５＜Ａ６、Ａ７＞Ａ８、Ｂ５＞Ｂ６、Ｂ７＞Ｂ８、Ｃ５＜Ｃ６、Ｃ７＜Ｃ８である［１６］、［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｅ］、［１５ａ］～［１５ｃ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１６ｂ］Ａ５は３６０００～４６０００、Ｂ５は２３０００～２６０００、Ｃ５は０．０７０～０．０８０、Ａ６は３７０００～４１０００、Ｂ６は１５０００～１８０００、Ｃ６は０．０８～０．１０、Ａ７は５７０００～６１０００、Ｂ７は２８０００～３４０００、Ｃ７は０．０３～０．０５、Ａ８は４００００～４３０００、Ｂ８は１７０００～２００００、Ｃ８は０．０４～０．０６である［１６］、［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｅ］、［１５ａ］～［１５ｃ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
［１６ｃ］Ａ５は３６０００、Ｂ５は２３０００、Ｃ５は０．０８０、Ａ６は３７０００、Ｂ６は１５０００、Ｃ６は０．１０、Ａ７は５７０００、Ｂ７は２８０００、Ｃ７は０．０５、Ａ８は４００００、Ｂ８は１７０００、Ｃ８は０．０６である［１６］、［１７］、［１４ａ］～［１４ｅ］、［１５ａ］～［１５ｃ］のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。 The depression state determination system according to the embodiment of the present invention that has been able to solve the above problems is as follows [14], and preferred embodiments are the following [15] to [17] and [14a] to [14e]. , [15a] to [15c], [16a] to [16c].
[14] A measuring unit that measures the pulsation interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity (hereinafter referred to as "activity amount") accompanying the movement of the subject, and the pulsation interval is converted into a frequency spectrum. The processing unit that calculates LF and HF by constant integration of the power spectrum obtained including the steps, and the left side of the following formula are calculated according to the gender and age of the subject, and the value of the left side is the following formula. A depression state determination system, comprising: a determination unit for determining that the subject is in a depressed state when the magnitude relationship is satisfied.
[I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
(LF / HF) / Activity> C1 ・ ・ ・ (1)
[II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
(LF / HF) x activity amount <C2 ... (2)
[III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
(LF / HF) / Activity> C3 ・ ・ ・ (3)
[IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
(LF / HF) x activity amount <C4 ... (4)
However, the first predetermined age and the second predetermined age are each one of 33 to 37 years old, and C1 to C4 are constants.
[15] The determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following equations according to the gender and age of the subject, and when the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following equation, the subject. The depression state determination system according to [14], wherein the examiner is controlled to determine that he / she is in a depression state.
[I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
Beat interval x activity <A1 ... (5)
HF x activity amount <B1 ... (6)
[II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
Beat interval x activity <A2 ・ ・ ・ (7)
HF x activity amount <B2 ... (8)
[III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
Beat interval x activity <A3 ・ ・ ・ (9)
HF x activity amount <B3 ... (10)
[IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
Beat interval x activity <A4 ・ ・ ・ (11)
HF x activity amount <B4 ... (12)
However, A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 are constants.
[16] The determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and when the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula, the subject. The depression state determination system according to [14] or [15], wherein the examiner is controlled to determine that the person is in a depressed state.
[I] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A5 ・ ・ ・ (13)
HF / activity amount <B5 ... (14)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C5 ... (15)
[II] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject over the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A6 ・ ・ ・ (16)
HF / activity amount <B6 ... (17)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C6 ... (18)
[III] In the sleeping hours of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A7 ・ ・ ・ (19)
HF / activity amount <B7 ... (20)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C7 ... (21)
[IV] In the sleeping hours of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A8 ・ ・ ・ (22)
HF / activity amount <B8 ... (23)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C8 ... (24)
However, A5 to A8, B5 to B8, and C5 to C8 are constants.
[17] The depression state determination system according to any one of [14] to [16], wherein the RR interval, which is the interval between the R waves in the electrocardiographic signal, is used as the pulsation interval.
[14a] Any of [14] to [17], wherein the first predetermined age is 34, 35, or 36 years old, and the second predetermined age is 34, 35, or 36 years old. The depression state determination system according to item 1.
[14b] The depression state determination system according to any one of [14] to [17], wherein the first predetermined age is 35 years old and the second predetermined age is 35 years old.
[14c] The depression state determination system according to any one of [14] to [17], [14a], and [14b], wherein C1> C3 and C2> C4.
[14d] C1 is 5 to 15, C2 is 0.5 to 0.9, C3 is 10 to 14, and C4 is 0.45 to 0.55 [14] to [17]. The depression state determination system according to any one of [14a] to [14c].
[14e] C1 is 15, C2 is 0.5, C3 is 14, and C4 is 0.45. Any one of [14] to [17] and [14a] to [14c]. Depression state determination system described in.
[15a] The depression state determination system according to any one of [15] to [17] and [14a] to [14e], wherein A1> A2, A3> A4, B1> B2, and B3> B4.
[15b] A1 is 160 to 180, B1 is 80 to 100, A2 is 130 to 150, B2 is 70 to 90, A3 is 160 to 180, B3 is 55 to 65, A4 is 145 to 165, and B4 is 50 to 60. The depression state determination system according to any one of [15] to [17] and [14a] to [14e].
[15c] A1 is 160, B1 is 80, A2 is 130, B2 is 70, A3 is 160, B3 is 55, A4 is 145, and B4 is 50 [15] to [17], [14a] to [14e]. ] The depression state determination system according to any one of the items.
[16a] A5 <A6, A7> A8, B5> B6, B7> B8, C5 <C6, C7 <C8 [16], [17], [14a] to [14e], [15a] to [15c] ] The depression state determination system according to any one of the items.
[16b] A5 is 36000 to 46000, B5 is 23000 to 26000, C5 is 0.070 to 0.080, A6 is 37000 to 41000, B6 is 15000 to 18000, C6 is 0.08 to 0.10, and A7 is 57000. ~ 61000, B7 is 28,000 to 34,000, C7 is 0.03 to 0.05, A8 is 40,000 to 43,000, B8 is 17,000 to 20,000, and C8 is 0.04 to 0.06 [16], [17], The depression state determination system according to any one of [14a] to [14e] and [15a] to [15c].
[16c] A5 is 36000, B5 is 23000, C5 is 0.080, A6 is 37000, B6 is 15000, C6 is 0.10, A7 is 57000, B7 is 28000, C7 is 0.05, A8 is 40,000, B8. Is 17000, and C8 is 0.06. The depression state determination system according to any one of [16], [17], [14a] to [14e], and [15a] to [15c].
　本発明のうつ状態であると判定するための判別方法、及びうつ状態判定システムによれば、被験者の年齢、性別に応じてうつ状態であるか否かを判別することができる。これにより、医療機関への受診等が促進されて、うつ病の早期発見、早期治療につながる。 According to the determination method for determining depression according to the present invention and the depression determination system, it is possible to determine whether or not the subject is depressed according to the age and gender of the subject. This promotes consultations with medical institutions and leads to early detection and treatment of depression.
図１は、パワースペクトル積分の説明図である。FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of power spectrum integration. 図２は、実施の形態１に係るうつ状態判定システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a depression state determination system according to the first embodiment. 図３は、実施の形態２に係るうつ状態判定システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the second embodiment. 図４は、実施の形態３に係るうつ状態判定システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the third embodiment. 図５は、実施の形態４に係るうつ状態判定システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the fourth embodiment. 図６は、実施の形態５に係るうつ状態判定システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the fifth embodiment. 図７は、実施の形態６に係るうつ状態判定システムの構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system according to the sixth embodiment.
　本発明の実施の形態に係る判別方法は、被検者がうつ状態であると判定するために、被検者の拍動間隔と、被検者の動きに伴う加速度または角速度（以下、「活動量」と記載する）とを計測する計測ステップ、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含む。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ１　・・・（１）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ２　・・・（２）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ３　・・・（３）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ４　・・・（４）
　但し、第１の所定年齢と第２の所定年齢は、それぞれ３３歳～３７歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であり、ＬＦ、ＨＦは、拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換するステップを含んで得たパワースペクトルを定積分して得た値であり、Ｃ１～Ｃ４は定数である。 In the discrimination method according to the embodiment of the present invention, in order to determine that the subject is in a depressed state, the pulsation interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity accompanying the movement of the subject (hereinafter, "activity"). Whether or not the measurement step for measuring (described as "quantity"), the calculation step for calculating the left side of the following formula according to the gender and age of the subject, and the value on the left side satisfy the magnitude relationship of the following formula. Includes a discriminant step to discriminate.
[I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
(LF / HF) / Activity> C1 ・ ・ ・ (1)
[II] (LF / HF) x activity amount <C2 ... (2) in the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age.
[III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
(LF / HF) / Activity> C3 ・ ・ ・ (3)
[IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
(LF / HF) x activity amount <C4 ... (4)
However, the first predetermined age and the second predetermined age are each one of 33 to 37 years old, and LF and HF were obtained by including a step of frequency spectrum conversion of the beat interval. It is a value obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum, and C1 to C4 are constants.
　特許文献１では、上述の通り、被検者の年齢、性別に関わらず覚醒時間帯における（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量等がうつ状態の判定のためのパラメータとして用いられていた。本発明者らの検討により、被験者が所定年齢以上の男女の場合には、覚醒時間帯における（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量をパラメータとして用いれば、うつ状態の判別精度が向上することが分かった。以下では、当該判別方法、うつ状態判定システムの順に説明する。 In Patent Document 1, as described above, (LF / HF) / activity amount and the like in the awakening time zone are used as parameters for determining the depressed state regardless of the age and gender of the subject. According to the studies by the present inventors, it was found that when the subjects are men and women of a predetermined age or older, the accuracy of determining the depressed state is improved by using (LF / HF) × activity amount in the awakening time zone as a parameter. .. Hereinafter, the determination method and the depression state determination system will be described in this order.
　１．うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法
　以下では、うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法についてステップ毎に説明する。 1. 1. Discrimination Method for Determining Depression The following describes a determination method for determining depression in each step.
　〈計測ステップ〉
　計測ステップでは、被検者の拍動間隔と、被検者の動きに伴う加速度または角速度である活動量とを計測する。 <Measurement step>
In the measurement step, the beat interval of the subject and the amount of activity, which is the acceleration or angular velocity associated with the movement of the subject, are measured.
　拍動間隔としては、心拍あるいは脈拍の間隔が好ましい（単位：ｍｓ）。心拍間隔は、心電図からＲ波とＲ波の間隔を読み取ること、あるいは隣り合う心拍同士の間隔を計測することにより取得してもよい。脈拍間隔は、隣り合う脈拍同士の間隔を計測することにより取得してもよい。拍動間隔またはその揺動は、自律神経活動を示しているといわれている。 The beat interval is preferably a heartbeat or pulse interval (unit: ms). The heartbeat interval may be acquired by reading the interval between the R waves and the R wave from the electrocardiogram, or by measuring the interval between adjacent heartbeats. The pulse interval may be acquired by measuring the interval between adjacent pulses. The beat interval or its fluctuation is said to indicate autonomic nervous activity.
　拍動間隔として、心電信号におけるＲ波とＲ波との間隔であるＲＲ間隔（以下、「ＲＲＩ」と記載する）を用いることが好ましい。ＲＲＩは信号のピークがはっきり出ることにより拍動間隔の精度が高くなるため、ピーク位置の誤認識が起こりにくい。 As the pulsation interval, it is preferable to use the RR interval (hereinafter referred to as "RRI"), which is the interval between the R wave and the R wave in the electrocardiographic signal. In RRI, since the peak of the signal appears clearly, the accuracy of the pulsation interval is improved, so that erroneous recognition of the peak position is unlikely to occur.
　活動量とは、被検者の動きに伴う加速度または角速度であり、重力加速度ｇに対する比で表してもよい（単位：無次元量）。被検者の動きに伴う加速度Ａとしては、例えば以下の式（Ｉ）で表されるように、３軸加速度計等を用いて計測される加速度であるＸ軸、Ｙ軸、Ｚ軸方向の加速度ｘ、ｙ、ｚの二乗和の平方根から重力加速度ｇ（＝９．８ｍ／ｓ2）分を減じた値が挙げられる（ここで単位ｇは重力加速度の大きさを表す）。動きがないときの加速度Ａは０である。 The amount of activity is an acceleration or an angular velocity accompanying the movement of the subject, and may be expressed as a ratio to the gravitational acceleration g (unit: dimensionless quantity). The acceleration A accompanying the movement of the subject is, for example, as expressed by the following equation (I), which is the acceleration measured by using a 3-axis accelerometer or the like in the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions. A value obtained by subtracting the gravitational acceleration g (= 9.8 m / s 2 ) from the square root of the sum of squares of the accelerations x, y, and z (where the unit g represents the magnitude of the gravitational acceleration). The acceleration A when there is no movement is 0.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000001
　被検者の動きに伴う加速度Ａは、２軸加速度計を用いて計測される被験者の加速度であるＸ軸、Ｙ軸の加速度ｘ、ｙの二乗和の平方根であってもよく、更にこれを重力加速度ｇ（＝９．８ｍ／ｓ2）に対する比で表したものであってもよい（単位：無次元量）。この場合、２軸加速度計は、測定方向が重力方向と垂直な方向になるように被験者に取付けられることが好ましい。加速度計として、ユニオンツール株式会社製のｍｙＢｅａｔ（登録商標）が挙げられる。加速度計は被験者の胸部または腹部に配置されることが好ましく、胸部に配置されることがより好ましい。 The acceleration A accompanying the movement of the subject may be the square root of the sum of squares of the accelerations x and y of the X-axis and the Y-axis, which are the accelerations of the subject measured by the two-axis accelerometer. It may be expressed as a ratio to the gravitational acceleration g (= 9.8 m / s 2 ) (unit: dimensionless quantity). In this case, it is preferable that the biaxial accelerometer is attached to the subject so that the measurement direction is perpendicular to the direction of gravity. Examples of the accelerometer include myBeat (registered trademark) manufactured by Union Tool Co., Ltd. The accelerometer is preferably placed on the chest or abdomen of the subject, more preferably on the chest.
　一方、角速度Ωは被検者のＸ軸、Ｙ軸、Ｚ軸周りの角速度ωｘ、ωｙ、ωｚの二乗和の平方根であり、単位はｒａｄ／ｓまたは１／ｓである。つまり、角速度Ωは以下の式（ＩＩ）で表される。 On the other hand, the angular velocity Ω is the square root of the sum of squares of the angular velocities ω x , ω y , and ω z around the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis of the subject, and the unit is rad / s or 1 / s. That is, the angular velocity Ω is expressed by the following equation (II).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000002
　角速度は回転を検出するため、例えば、睡眠時間帯における被検者の寝返りの頻度などを検出するのに適している。 Since the angular velocity detects rotation, it is suitable for detecting, for example, the frequency of turning over of the subject during the sleeping hours.
　〈計算ステップ〉
　計算ステップでは、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて、上記式（１）～（４）の左辺を計算する。これらのうち被検者の性別と年齢に応じて、被験者一人当り上記式（１）～（４）のうちの一つの左辺を計算すればよい。以下では、式（１）～（４）をまとめて第１群の式と呼ぶ場合がある。 <Calculation step>
In the calculation step, the left side of the above equations (1) to (4) is calculated according to the gender and age of the subject. Of these, the left side of one of the above equations (1) to (4) may be calculated for each subject according to the gender and age of the subject. In the following, the equations (1) to (4) may be collectively referred to as the first group of equations.
　式（１）、（２）に係る第１の所定年齢は、３３歳～３７歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であり、３４歳～３６歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であることが好ましく、３５歳であることがより好ましい。 The first predetermined age according to the formulas (1) and (2) is preferably any one of 33 to 37 years old, and preferably any one of 34 to 36 years old. It is more preferable to be 35 years old.
　式（３）、（４）に係る第２の所定年齢は、３３歳～３７歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であり、３４歳～３６歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であることが好ましく、３５歳であることがより好ましい。第２の所定年齢は、第１の所定年齢と異なっていてもよいが、同じ年齢であることが好ましい。 The second predetermined age according to the formulas (3) and (4) is preferably any one of 33 to 37 years old, and preferably any one of 34 to 36 years old. It is more preferable to be 35 years old. The second predetermined age may be different from the first predetermined age, but is preferably the same age.
　式（１）～（４）中、ＬＦ、ＨＦは、拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換するステップを含んで得たパワースペクトルを定積分して得た値である。ＬＦは、例えば、時間信号ｆである拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換するステップを含んで得たパワースペクトルを周波数Ｌｆ１からＬｆ２まで定積分した値であり、ＨＦは、例えば、前記パワースペクトルを周波数Ｈｆ１からＨｆ２まで定積分した値である。好ましくはＨｆ１＞Ｌｆ１、Ｈｆ２＞Ｌｆ２であり、より好ましくはＨｆ１＞Ｌｆ１、Ｈｆ２＞Ｌｆ２、Ｈｆ１≧Ｌｆ２である。例えば、ＬＦは、時間信号ｆである拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換したもの（周波数スペクトルＦ）を二乗することにより得られるパワースペクトルＦ2（第１のパワースペクトル）を周波数Ｌｆ１からＬｆ２まで定積分した値であり、ＨＦは、前記パワースペクトルＦ2（第１のパワースペクトル）を周波数Ｈｆ１（＞Ｌｆ１）からＨｆ２（＞Ｌｆ２）まで定積分した値とすることができる。第１のパワースペクトルＦ2を用いて計算されるＬＦ、ＨＦの単位はｍｓ2である。具体的なＣ１～Ｃ４の値は特に制限されるものではなく、パワースペクトル積分の積分範囲、活動量の種類（加速度または角速度）、被検者の年齢、性別等の条件に応じて設定することができる。周波数スペクトル変換の方法としては、例えば高速フーリエ変換（ＦＦＴ）、ウェーブレット解析、最大エントロピー法などを用いることができる。なお、本明細書においては、ＦＦＴを用いた場合を例として説明するが、もちろん他の方法を用いることも可能である。 In the equations (1) to (4), LF and HF are values obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum obtained by including the step of converting the beat interval into the frequency spectrum. LF is, for example, a value obtained by definitely integrating a power spectrum obtained by including a step of frequency spectrum conversion of a beat interval, which is a time signal f, from frequencies Lf1 to Lf2, and HF is, for example, the power spectrum obtained by frequency Hf1. It is a value obtained by constant integration from Hf2 to Hf2. It is preferable that Hf1> Lf1 and Hf2> Lf2, and more preferably Hf1> Lf1, Hf2> Lf2, and Hf1 ≧ Lf2. For example, LF is a constant integration of the power spectrum F 2 (first power spectrum) obtained by squaring the beat interval, which is a time signal f, converted into a frequency spectrum (frequency spectrum F) from frequencies Lf1 to Lf2. The HF can be a value obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum F 2 (first power spectrum) from the frequencies Hf1 (> Lf1) to Hf2 (> Lf2). The unit of LF and HF calculated using the first power spectrum F 2 is ms 2 . The specific values of C1 to C4 are not particularly limited, and should be set according to the conditions such as the integration range of the power spectrum integral, the type of activity (acceleration or angular velocity), the age of the subject, and the gender. Can be done. As a method of frequency spectrum transform, for example, fast Fourier transform (FFT), wavelet analysis, maximum entropy method and the like can be used. In this specification, the case where FFT is used will be described as an example, but of course, other methods can also be used.
　例えば、拍動間隔をスプライン補間しサンプリング間隔Δｔで再サンプリングした拍動間隔ＲＲＩkの離散フーリエ変換Ｇkは、以下の式（ＩＩＩ）で表され、パワースペクトルＦ2（第１のパワースペクトル）（単位：ｍｓ2／Ｈｚ）は、以下の式（ＩＶ）で表される。ここで、ｋは時系列、Ｎはデータ数を表し、Ｓは任意のスケールであり、一般にパワースペクトラムではＳ＝１である。 For example, the discrete Fourier transform G k of the beat interval RRI k obtained by spline-interlacing the beat interval and re-sampling at the sampling interval Δt is expressed by the following equation (III), and the power spectrum F 2 (first power spectrum). (Unit: ms 2 / Hz) is expressed by the following equation (IV). Here, k represents a time series, N represents the number of data, S is an arbitrary scale, and generally S = 1 in the power spectrum.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000004
　他方、ＬＦおよびＨＦの値として、拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換した値から得たパワースペクトルＦ（第２のパワースペクトル）（単位：ｍｓ）を所定の区間で定積分したものを用いてもよい。このように、パワースペクトルとして拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換した値を用いれば、より簡便にＬＦおよびＨＦの値を算出することができる。第２のパワースペクトルＦを用いて計算されるＬＦ、ＨＦの単位は無次元量であることが好ましい。パワースペクトルＦ（第２のパワースペクトル）は、以下の式（Ｖ）で表される。 On the other hand, as the values of LF and HF, the power spectrum F (second power spectrum) (unit: ms) obtained from the value obtained by converting the beat interval into a frequency spectrum may be used as a definite integral over a predetermined interval. .. As described above, if the value obtained by converting the beat interval into the frequency spectrum is used as the power spectrum, the values of LF and HF can be calculated more easily. The units of LF and HF calculated using the second power spectrum F are preferably dimensionless quantities. The power spectrum F (second power spectrum) is represented by the following equation (V).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-M000005
　パワースペクトル積分について、図１を参照しながら説明する。図１の縦軸はパワースペクトル（単位：ｍｓ2／Ｈｚ）であり、横軸は周波数（単位：Ｈｚ）である。ＬＦは、パワースペクトルＦ2を例えば０．０４Ｈｚ（Ｌｆ１）から０．１５Ｈｚ（Ｌｆ２）まで定積分した値であり、図１において斜線によりハッチングがされている部分の面積である。一方、ＨＦは、パワースペクトルＦ2を例えば０．１５Ｈｚ（Ｈｆ１）から０．４Ｈｚ（Ｈｆ２）まで定積分した値であり、図１において縦線によりハッチングがされている部分の面積である。図１では、Ｌｆ２とＨｆ１がいずれも０．１５Ｈｚと等しくなるように積分範囲を設定したが、Ｌｆ１＜Ｈｆ１及びＬｆ２＜Ｈｆ２の関係を満たしていることが好ましく、更にＨｆ１≧Ｌｆ２の関係を満たしていることがより好ましい。ここでは、パワースペクトル積分の方法を、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2を用いて説明したが、第２のパワースペクトルＦによる定積分も同様に行うことができる。 The power spectrum integral will be described with reference to FIG. The vertical axis of FIG. 1 is the power spectrum (unit: ms 2 / Hz), and the horizontal axis is the frequency (unit: Hz). LF is a value obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum F 2 from, for example, 0.04 Hz (Lf1) to 0.15 Hz (Lf2), and is the area of the portion hatched by diagonal lines in FIG. On the other hand, HF is a value obtained by definitely integrating the power spectrum F 2 from, for example, 0.15 Hz (Hf1) to 0.4 Hz (Hf2), and is the area of the portion hatched by the vertical line in FIG. In FIG. 1, the integration range is set so that both Lf2 and Hf1 are equal to 0.15 Hz, but it is preferable that the relationship of Lf1 <Hf1 and Lf2 <Hf2 is satisfied, and further the relationship of Hf1 ≧ Lf2 is satisfied. Is more preferable. Here, the method of power spectrum integration has been described using the first power spectrum F 2 , but definite integral by the second power spectrum F can also be performed in the same manner.
　周波数スペクトル変換により得られるパワースペクトルは、血圧の変動に由来する成分でＭａｙｅｒ－Ｗａｖｅ関連成分ともいわれるＬＦと、呼吸に由来する成分ＨＦとに分けられる。血圧変動成分ＬＦは０．１Ｈｚ周辺のパワースペクトルであり、交感神経活動と副交感神経活動の双方に関連している。一方、呼吸由来の成分ＨＦは０．３Ｈｚ周辺のパワースペクトルで、副交感神経活動に関連していると考えられている。以上のことから、交感神経活動及び副交感神経活動を示すＬＦの積分範囲は、少なくとも０．１Ｈｚを含み、Ｌｆ１＜０．１＜Ｌｆ２であることが好ましい。また、Ｌｆ１は０．０３Ｈｚであることがより好ましく、０．０４Ｈｚであることがさらに好ましい。Ｌｆ２は０．１６Ｈｚであることがより好ましく、０．１５Ｈｚであることがさらに好ましい。また、副交感神経活動を示すＨＦの積分範囲は、少なくとも０．３Ｈｚを含み、Ｈｆ１＜０．３＜Ｈｆ２であることが好ましい。Ｈｆ１は０．１４Ｈｚであることがより好ましく、０．１５Ｈｚであることがさらに好ましい。Ｈｆ２は０．４１Ｈｚであることがより好ましく、０．４Ｈｚであることがさらに好ましい。 The power spectrum obtained by frequency spectrum conversion is divided into LF, which is a component derived from fluctuations in blood pressure and is also called a Mayer-Wave-related component, and HF, which is a component derived from respiration. The blood pressure fluctuation component LF is a power spectrum around 0.1 Hz and is related to both sympathetic nerve activity and parasympathetic nerve activity. On the other hand, the respiratory component HF has a power spectrum around 0.3 Hz and is considered to be related to parasympathetic nerve activity. From the above, the integration range of LF indicating sympathetic nerve activity and parasympathetic nerve activity includes at least 0.1 Hz, and it is preferable that Lf1 <0.1 <Lf2. Further, Lf1 is more preferably 0.03 Hz, further preferably 0.04 Hz. Lf2 is more preferably 0.16 Hz, and even more preferably 0.15 Hz. Further, the integration range of HF indicating parasympathetic nerve activity includes at least 0.3 Hz, and it is preferable that Hf1 <0.3 <Hf2. Hf1 is more preferably 0.14 Hz, and even more preferably 0.15 Hz. Hf2 is more preferably 0.41 Hz, and even more preferably 0.4 Hz.
　〈判別ステップ〉
　判別ステップでは、計算ステップにて算出された左辺の値が、各式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する。 <Discrimination step>
In the determination step, it is determined whether or not the value on the left side calculated in the calculation step satisfies the magnitude relationship of each equation.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢未満の男性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（１）の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ１の大小関係を満たすか否か判別する。当該大小関係を満たすと判別する場合には、うつ状態である可能性が高いことを意味する。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ１は５であることが好ましく、１０であることがより好ましく、１５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ１の単位は無次元量である。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ１は５であることが好ましく、１０であることがより好ましく、１５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ１の単位は無次元量である。 In the discrimination step, for a man under the first predetermined age, it is determined whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) / activity amount> C1 of the formula (1) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied. When it is determined that the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it means that there is a high possibility of depression. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity, the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz, and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 5, more preferably 10, and even more preferably 15. Here, the unit of C1 is a dimensionless quantity. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of LF obtained from the second power spectrum F is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, C1 is It is preferably 5, more preferably 10, and even more preferably 15. Here, the unit of C1 is a dimensionless quantity.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢以上の男性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（２）の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ２の大小関係を満たすか否か判別する。当該大小関係を満たすと判別する場合には、うつ状態である可能性が高いことを意味する。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ２は０．９であることが好ましく、０．７であることがより好ましく、０．５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ２の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（２）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＜Ｃ２１としてもよい。このときＣ２１は、Ｃ２に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ２１＝Ｃ２×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ２は０．５であることが好ましく、０．４であることがより好ましく、０．３であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ２の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（２）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＜Ｃ２１としてもよい。このときＣ２１は、Ｃ２に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ２１＝Ｃ２×１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, for a man of the first predetermined age or older, it is determined whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) × activity amount <C2 of the formula (2) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied. When it is determined that the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it means that there is a high possibility of depression. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity, the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz, and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.9, more preferably 0.7, and even more preferably 0.5. Here, the unit of C2 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (2) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100 <C21. At this time, C21 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C2 by 100, that is, C21 = C2 × 100. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of LF obtained from the second power spectrum F is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, C2 is It is preferably 0.5, more preferably 0.4, and even more preferably 0.3. Here, the unit of C2 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (2) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100 <C21. At this time, C21 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C2 by 100, that is, C21 = C2 × 100.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢未満の女性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（３）の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ３の大小関係を満たすか否か判別する。当該大小関係を満たすと判別する場合には、うつ状態である可能性が高いことを意味する。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ３は１０であることが好ましく、１２であることがより好ましく、１４であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ３の単位は無次元量である。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ３は４であることが好ましく、７であることがより好ましく、１０であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ３の単位は無次元量である。 In the determination step, for the second female under a predetermined age, it is determined whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) / activity amount> C3 of the formula (3) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied. When it is determined that the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it means that there is a high possibility of depression. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity, the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz, and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 10, more preferably 12, and even more preferably 14. Here, the unit of C3 is a dimensionless quantity. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of LF obtained from the second power spectrum F is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, C3 is It is preferably 4, more preferably 7, and even more preferably 10. Here, the unit of C3 is a dimensionless quantity.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢以上の女性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（４）の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ４の大小関係を満たすか否か判別する。当該大小関係を満たすと判別する場合には、うつ状態である可能性が高いことを意味する。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ４は０．５５であることが好ましく、０．５０であることがより好ましく、０．４５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ４の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（４）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＜Ｃ４１としてもよい。このときＣ４１は、Ｃ４に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ４１＝Ｃ４×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ４は０．０４５であることが好ましく、０．０３０であることがより好ましく、０．０１５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ４の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（４）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＜Ｃ４１としてもよい。このときＣ４１は、Ｃ４に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ４１＝Ｃ４×１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, for a woman of a second predetermined age or older, it is determined whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) × activity amount <C4 of the formula (4) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied. When it is determined that the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it means that there is a high possibility of depression. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity, the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz, and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.55, more preferably 0.50, and even more preferably 0.45. Here, the unit of C4 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (4) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100 <C41. At this time, C41 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C4 by 100, that is, C41 = C4 × 100. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of LF obtained from the second power spectrum F is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, C4 is It is preferably 0.045, more preferably 0.030, and even more preferably 0.015. Here, the unit of C4 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (4) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100 <C41. At this time, C41 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C4 by 100, that is, C41 = C4 × 100.
　Ｃ１＞Ｃ３であることが好ましい。若年層において男性の方が女性より覚醒時間帯の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ｃ１＞Ｃ３とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that C1> C3. In the younger age group, the value of (LF / HF) / activity amount in the awakening time zone is more likely to be larger in men than in women. Therefore, by setting C1> C3, the accuracy of determining the depressed state is improved.
　Ｃ２＞Ｃ４であることが好ましい。高年層において男性の方が女性より覚醒時間帯の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ｃ２＞Ｃ４とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that C2> C4. Since the value of (LF / HF) × activity amount in the awakening time zone is more likely to be larger in the elderly than in the female, setting C2> C4 improves the accuracy of determining the depressed state.
　Ｃ１＞Ｃ３、及びＣ２＞Ｃ４のうち少なくとも一つの大小関係を満たすことが好ましく、Ｃ１＞Ｃ３、及びＣ２＞Ｃ４の大小関係を満たすことがより好ましい。 It is preferable to satisfy at least one magnitude relationship of C1> C3 and C2> C4, and it is more preferable to satisfy the magnitude relationship of C1> C3 and C2> C4.
　うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法は、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含むことが好ましい。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ１　　　　・・・（５）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ１　　　　　　・・・（６）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ２　　　　・・・（７）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ２　　　　　　・・・（８）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ３　　　　・・・（９）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ３　　　　　　・・・（１０）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ４　　　　・・・（１１）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ４　　　　　　・・・（１２）
　但し、Ａ１～Ａ４、Ｂ１～Ｂ４は定数である。 The method for determining depression is a calculation step for calculating the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and the value of the left side is the magnitude relation of the following formulas. It is preferable to include a determination step for determining whether or not the above is satisfied.
[I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
Beat interval x activity <A1 ... (5)
HF x activity amount <B1 ... (6)
[II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
Beat interval x activity <A2 ・ ・ ・ (7)
HF x activity amount <B2 ... (8)
[III] Pulsation interval x activity amount <A3 ... (9) in the awakening time zone of the second female subject under the prescribed age.
HF x activity amount <B3 ... (10)
[IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
Beat interval x activity <A4 ・ ・ ・ (11)
HF x activity amount <B4 ... (12)
However, A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 are constants.
　上記左辺の値が、各式の大小関係を満足するか否かについても判別することにより、健常者をうつ状態と判別してしまう誤判定の発生を低減することができる。以下では、上記式（５）～（１２）をまとめて第２群の式と呼ぶ場合がある。 By also determining whether or not the value on the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of each equation, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of erroneous determination that a healthy person is determined to be depressed. In the following, the above equations (5) to (12) may be collectively referred to as a second group equation.
　上記計算ステップでは、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて第１群の式の左辺と第２群の式の左辺とを計算することが好ましい。例えば、第１の所定年齢未満の男性の場合には、式（１）の左辺に加えて、式（５）および／または式（６）の左辺を計算することが好ましく、式（１）と式（５）または式（６）との左辺を計算することがより好ましく、式（１）、式（５）および式（６）の左辺を計算することが更に好ましい。また、第１の所定年齢以上の男性の場合には、式（２）の左辺に加えて、式（７）および／または（８）の左辺を計算することが好ましく、式（２）と式（７）または式（８）との左辺を計算することがより好ましく、式（２）、式（７）および式（８）の左辺を計算することが更に好ましい。また、第２の所定年齢未満の女性の場合には、式（３）の左辺に加えて、式（９）および／または（１０）の左辺を計算することが好ましく、式（３）と式（９）または（１０）の左辺を計算することがより好ましく、式（３）、式（９）および式（１０）の左辺を計算することが更に好ましい。また、第２の所定年齢以上の女性の場合には、式（４）の左辺に加えて、式（１１）および／または（１２）の左辺を計算することが好ましく、式（４）と式（１１）または（１２）との左辺を計算することがより好ましく、式（４）、式（１１）、および式（１２）の左辺を計算することが更に好ましい。なお、式（１）～式（４）のうちいずれか一つの式の左辺のみを計算してもよい。 In the above calculation step, it is preferable to calculate the left side of the formula of the first group and the left side of the formula of the second group according to the gender and age of the subject. For example, in the case of a male under the first predetermined age, it is preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (5) and / or the equation (6) in addition to the left side of the equation (1). It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the formula (5) or the formula (6), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the formula (1), the formula (5) and the formula (6). Further, in the case of a male of the first predetermined age or older, it is preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (7) and / or (8) in addition to the left side of the equation (2), and the equation (2) and the equation (2) and the equation. It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (7) or the equation (8), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (2), the equation (7) and the equation (8). In the case of a second female under a predetermined age, it is preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (9) and / or (10) in addition to the left side of the equation (3), and the equation (3) and the equation (3) and the equation. It is more preferable to calculate the left side of (9) or (10), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the equations (3), (9) and (10). Further, in the case of a woman of a second predetermined age or older, it is preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (11) and / or (12) in addition to the left side of the equation (4), and it is preferable to calculate the equation (4) and the equation. It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (11) or (12), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the equations (4), (11), and (12). It should be noted that only the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) may be calculated.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢未満の男性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（５）の拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ１の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量が加速度の場合には、Ａ１は１８０ｍｓであることが好ましく、１７０ｍｓであることがより好ましく、１６０ｍｓであることがさらに好ましい。なお、うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（５）は拍動間隔×活動量／１００＜Ａ１１としてもよい。このときＡ１１は、Ａ１を１００で除した値、つまりＡ１１＝Ａ１／１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, for men under the first predetermined age, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the pulsation interval x activity amount <A1 magnitude relationship in the equation (5) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied. For example, when the amount of activity is acceleration, A1 is preferably 180 ms, more preferably 170 ms, and even more preferably 160 ms. In addition, in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (5) may be set to beat interval × activity amount / 100 <A11. At this time, A11 is represented by a value obtained by dividing A1 by 100, that is, A11 = A1 / 100.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢未満の男性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（６）のＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ１の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ１は１００ｍｓ2であることが好ましく、９０ｍｓ2であることがより好ましく、８０ｍｓ2であることがさらに好ましい。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（６）はＨＦ×活動量×１００＜Ｂ１１としてもよい。このときＢ１１は、Ｂ１に１００を乗じた値、つまりＢ１１＝Ｂ１×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ１は１０であることが好ましく、９であることがより好ましく、８であることがより好ましい。ここでＢ１の単位は無次元量である。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the males under the first predetermined age satisfy the magnitude relationship of HF × activity amount <B1 of the formula (6) in the awakening time zone of the subject. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B 1 is preferably 100 ms 2 and is preferably 90 ms 2 . Is more preferable, and 80 ms 2 is even more preferable. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (6) may be HF × activity amount × 100 <B11. At this time, B11 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying B1 by 100, that is, B11 = B1 × 100. On the other hand, when the integration range of HF obtained from the second power spectrum F is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz by using acceleration as the amount of activity, B1 is preferably 10 and more preferably 9. It is preferably 8, and more preferably 8. Here, the unit of B1 is a dimensionless quantity.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢以上の男性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（７）の拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ２の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量が加速度の場合には、Ａ２は１５０ｍｓであることが好ましく、１４０ｍｓであることがより好ましく、１３０ｍｓであることがさらに好ましい。なお、うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（７）式は拍動間隔×活動量／１００＜Ａ２１としてもよい。このときＡ２１は、Ａ２を１００で除した値、つまりＡ２１＝Ａ２／１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the pulsation interval x activity amount <A2 magnitude relationship of the equation (7) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male of the first predetermined age or older. For example, when the amount of activity is acceleration, A2 is preferably 150 ms, more preferably 140 ms, and even more preferably 130 ms. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (7) may be set to beat interval × activity amount / 100 <A21. At this time, A21 is represented by a value obtained by dividing A2 by 100, that is, A21 = A2 / 100.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢以上の男性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（８）のＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ２の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ２は９０ｍｓ2であることが好ましく、８０ｍｓ2であることがより好ましく、７０ｍｓ2であることがさらに好ましい。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（８）はＨＦ×活動量×１００＜Ｂ２１としてもよい。このときＢ２１は、Ｂ２に１００を乗じた値、つまりＢ２１＝Ｂ２×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ２は４．５であることが好ましく、３．５であることがより好ましく、２．５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＢ２の単位は無次元量である。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the magnitude relationship of HF × activity amount <B2 of the formula (8) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male of the first predetermined age or older. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B2 is preferably 90 ms 2 and preferably 80 ms 2 . Is more preferable, and 70 ms 2 is even more preferable. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (8) may be HF × activity amount × 100 <B21. At this time, B21 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying B2 by 100, that is, B21 = B2 × 100. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the second power spectrum F is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B2 is preferably 4.5, and 3.5. It is more preferably present, and even more preferably 2.5. Here, the unit of B2 is a dimensionless quantity.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢未満の女性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（９）の拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ３の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量が加速度の場合には、Ａ３は１８０ｍｓであることが好ましく、１７０ｍｓであることがより好ましく、１６０ｍｓであることがさらに好ましい。なお、うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（９）は拍動間隔×活動量／１００＜Ａ３１としてもよい。このときＡ３１は、Ａ３を１００で除した値、つまりＡ３１＝Ａ３／１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the pulsation interval x activity amount <A3 magnitude relationship of the equation (9) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied for the second female under a predetermined age. For example, when the amount of activity is acceleration, A3 is preferably 180 ms, more preferably 170 ms, and even more preferably 160 ms. In addition, in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (9) may be set to beat interval × activity amount / 100 <A31. At this time, A31 is represented by a value obtained by dividing A3 by 100, that is, A31 = A3 / 100.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢未満の女性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（１０）のＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ３の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ３は６５ｍｓ2であることが好ましく、６０ｍｓ2であることがより好ましく、５５ｍｓ2であることがさらに好ましい。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１０）はＨＦ×活動量×１００＜Ｂ３１としてもよい。このときＢ３１は、Ｂ３に１００を乗じた値、つまりＢ３１＝Ｂ３×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ３は１０であることが好ましく、９であることがより好ましく、８であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＢ３の単位は無次元量である。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the female under the second predetermined age satisfies the magnitude relationship of HF × activity amount <B3 of the formula (10) in the awakening time zone of the subject. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B 3 is preferably 65 ms 2 and preferably 60 ms 2 . Is more preferable, and 55 ms 2 is even more preferable. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (10) may be HF × activity amount × 100 <B31. At this time, B31 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying B3 by 100, that is, B31 = B3 × 100. On the other hand, when the integration range of HF obtained from the second power spectrum F is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz by using acceleration as the amount of activity, B3 is preferably 10 and more preferably 9. It is preferably 8, and even more preferably 8. Here, the unit of B3 is a dimensionless quantity.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢以上の女性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（１１）の拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ４の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量が加速度の場合には、Ａ４は１６５ｍｓであることが好ましく、１５５ｍｓであることがより好ましく、１４５ｍｓであることがさらに好ましい。なお、うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１１）は拍動間隔×活動量／１００＜Ａ４１としてもよい。このときＡ４１は、Ａ４を１００で除した値、つまりＡ４１＝Ａ４／１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the pulsation interval x activity amount <A4 magnitude relationship of the equation (11) in the awakening time zone of the subject is satisfied for the second predetermined age or older female. For example, when the amount of activity is acceleration, A4 is preferably 165 ms, more preferably 155 ms, and even more preferably 145 ms. In addition, in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (11) may be set to beat interval × activity amount / 100 <A41. At this time, A41 is represented by a value obtained by dividing A4 by 100, that is, A41 = A4 / 100.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢以上の女性については、被検者の覚醒時間帯における式（１２）のＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ４の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ４は６０ｍｓ2であることが好ましく、５５ｍｓ2であることがより好ましく、５０ｍｓ2であることがさらに好ましい。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１２）はＨＦ×活動量×１００＜Ｂ４１としてもよい。このときＢ４１は、Ｂ４に１００を乗じた値、つまりＢ４１＝Ｂ４×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ４は４．０であることが好ましく、３．５であることがより好ましく、３．０であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＢ４の単位は無次元量である。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the female of the second predetermined age or older satisfies the magnitude relationship of HF × activity amount <B4 of the formula (12) in the awakening time zone of the subject. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B4 is preferably 60 ms 2 and 55 ms 2 . Is more preferable, and 50 ms 2 is even more preferable. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (12) may be HF × activity amount × 100 <B41. At this time, B41 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying B4 by 100, that is, B41 = B4 × 100. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the second power spectrum F is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B4 is preferably 4.0, preferably 3.5. It is more preferably present, and even more preferably 3.0. Here, the unit of B4 is a dimensionless quantity.
　Ａ１＞Ａ２であることが好ましい。若年層の男性の方が高年層の男性の方よりも覚醒時間帯の拍動間隔×活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ａ１＞Ａ２とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that A1> A2. Since younger men are more likely to have a larger value of pulsation interval x activity during awakening time than older men, setting A1> A2 improves the accuracy of determining depression. do.
　Ａ３＞Ａ４であることが好ましい。若年層の女性の方が高年層の女性の方よりも覚醒時間帯の拍動間隔×活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ａ３＞Ａ４とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that A3> A4. Since young women tend to have a larger value of pulsation interval x activity during awakening time than older women, setting A3> A4 improves the accuracy of determining depression. do.
　Ｂ１＞Ｂ２であることが好ましい。若年層の男性の方が高年層の男性の方よりも覚醒時間帯のＨＦ×活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ｂ１＞Ｂ２とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that B1> B2. Since the value of HF × activity in the awakening time zone tends to be larger in younger men than in older men, setting B1> B2 improves the accuracy of determining the depressed state.
　Ｂ３＞Ｂ４であることが好ましい。若年層の女性の方が高年層の女性の方よりも覚醒時間帯のＨＦ×活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ｂ３＞Ｂ４とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that B3> B4. Since the value of HF × activity in the awakening time zone is more likely to be larger in young women than in older women, setting B3> B4 improves the accuracy of determining the depressed state.
　Ａ１＞Ａ２、Ａ３＞Ａ４、Ｂ１＞Ｂ２、及びＢ３＞Ｂ４のうち少なくとも一つの大小関係を満たすことが好ましく、Ａ１＞Ａ２、Ｂ１＞Ｂ２、及びＢ３＞Ｂ４の大小関係を満たすことが好ましく、Ａ１＞Ａ２、Ａ３＞Ａ４、Ｂ１＞Ｂ２、及びＢ３＞Ｂ４の大小関係を満たすことがより好ましい。 It is preferable to satisfy the magnitude relation of at least one of A1> A2, A3> A4, B1> B2, and B3> B4, and it is preferable to satisfy the magnitude relation of A1> A2, B1> B2, and B3> B4. It is more preferable to satisfy the magnitude relationship of A1> A2, A3> A4, B1> B2, and B3> B4.
　被験者毎に、上記第１群の式である式（１）～（４）のうちの少なくとも一つの式に加えて、上記第２群の式（５）～（１２）のうちの少なくとも一つの式の大小関係を満たす場合に、うつ状態であると判定してもよい。上記第２群の式（５）～（１２）の条件を加えることにより、健常者をうつ状態と判別してしまう誤判定の発生を低減することができる。 For each subject, in addition to at least one of the formulas (1) to (4) of the first group, at least one of the formulas (5) to (12) of the second group. If the magnitude relation of the expression is satisfied, it may be determined that the patient is depressed. By adding the conditions of the second group equations (5) to (12), it is possible to reduce the occurrence of erroneous determination that a healthy person is determined to be depressed.
　上記計測ステップ、および計算ステップでは、覚醒時間帯における被験者の生体情報を処理するが、更に、睡眠時間帯における被験者の生体情報を処理することが好ましい。覚醒時間帯とは被検者の目が覚めている、つまり起きている時間帯を指す。一方、睡眠時間帯とは、被検者が眠っている時間帯であり、覚醒時間帯以外の時間帯を指す。覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯は、被検者の生活環境や精神状態により様々な態様を示すものであり、時間長や時間帯が特に限定されるものではない。 In the measurement step and the calculation step, the biological information of the subject in the awakening time zone is processed, but it is preferable to further process the biological information of the subject in the sleeping time zone. The awakening time zone refers to the time zone in which the subject is awake, that is, awake. On the other hand, the sleep time zone is a time zone in which the subject is sleeping, and refers to a time zone other than the awakening time zone. The awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone show various modes depending on the living environment and mental state of the subject, and the time length and the time zone are not particularly limited.
　覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯の分類は、被検者へのアンケートによって睡眠開始時間と覚醒開始時間を自己申告してもらうことにより行ってもよいし、後述するうつ状態判定システムに設けられる入力手段により行ってもよい。そのほか、例えば特開２０１０－１７９１３３号公報や特開２００９－２９７４７４号公報に記載の公知の睡眠状態計測方法等を適用することもできる。 The awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone may be classified by having the subject self-report the sleep start time and the awakening start time by a questionnaire to the subject, or an input means provided in the depression state determination system described later. May be done by. In addition, for example, known sleep state measurement methods described in JP-A-2010-179133 and JP-A-2009-297474 can also be applied.
　被検者の姿勢に伴う加速度を計測し、加速度と所定値を比較することによって覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を分類することが好ましい。この分類方法によれば、被検者の自己申告は不要であるため、被検者の検査負担が軽減される。また、被検者の申告漏れや申告誤りによる覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯の分類ミスの発生も抑止される。 It is preferable to classify the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone by measuring the acceleration associated with the posture of the subject and comparing the acceleration with a predetermined value. According to this classification method, the subject's self-report is not required, so that the subject's inspection burden is reduced. In addition, the occurrence of misclassification of the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone due to the subject's omission of declaration or error in the declaration is suppressed.
　睡眠時間帯の身長方向の加速度が立位時に負の値となるように加速度計が調整されている場合、睡眠時間帯の身長方向の加速度は、覚醒時間帯の身長方向の加速度と比べて大きい傾向にある。このように、身長方向の加速度は、覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯で差があることから、覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯の分類に適している。そのため、覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯の分類に用いる加速度としては、被検者の姿勢に伴う身長方向の加速度であることが好ましい。身長方向とは、被検者の足部から頭部へ向かう方向である。 If the accelerometer is adjusted so that the accelerometer in the height direction of the sleeping time zone becomes a negative value when standing, the acceleration in the height direction of the sleeping time zone is larger than the acceleration in the height direction of the awakening time zone. There is a tendency. As described above, the acceleration in the height direction is suitable for the classification of the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone because there is a difference between the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone. Therefore, it is preferable that the acceleration used for classifying the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone is the acceleration in the height direction accompanying the posture of the subject. The height direction is the direction from the subject's feet to the head.
　身長方向の加速度を用いた覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯の分類としては、以下の第一の分類方法、第二の分類方法、第三の分類方法が挙げられる。 Examples of the classification of the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone using the acceleration in the height direction include the following first classification method, second classification method, and third classification method.
　第一の分類方法は、式（２５）が満足される時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、式（２５）が満足されない時間帯を覚醒時間帯に分類する方法である。以降説明する覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯の分類方法の例示において、被検者の立位時に計測された身長方向の加速度が正の値の場合は、身長方向の加速度に－１を乗算した値を負加速度Ｔ（単位：無次元量）とし、被検者の立位時に計測された身長方向の加速度が負の値の場合は、当該負の値を負加速度Ｔとする。
　Ｔ≧Ｄ１・・・（２５）
　但し、Ｄ１は定数である（単位：無次元量）。 The first classification method is a method of classifying the time zone in which the formula (25) is satisfied into the sleep time zone and the time zone in which the formula (25) is not satisfied into the awakening time zone. In the example of the method for classifying the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone described below, when the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject stands is a positive value, the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1. Is a negative acceleration T (unit: dimensionless quantity), and if the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject stands up is a negative value, the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T.
T ≧ D1 ... (25)
However, D1 is a constant (unit: dimensionless quantity).
　このように式（２５）を用いて負加速度Ｔと所定値Ｄ１の大小を比較することによって、覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を容易に分類することができる。この方法は、リアルタイムで覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を分類する必要がある場合に適している。Ｄ１は、－０．８５であることが好ましく、－０．８０であることがより好ましく、－０．７５であることが更に好ましい。 By comparing the magnitude of the negative acceleration T and the predetermined value D1 using the equation (25) in this way, the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone can be easily classified. This method is suitable when it is necessary to classify the wake time zone and the sleep time zone in real time. D1 is preferably −0.85, more preferably −0.80, and even more preferably −0.75.
　第二の分類方法は、式（２５）が満足される時間帯のうち最長の時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する方法である。具体的には、計測単位時間の間、式（２５）が満足される時間帯のうち最長の時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、当該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する。計測単位時間は、計測開始から計測終了までの時間長である。本方法では式（２５）が満足される最長の時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類することから、この際、１日に少なくとも１つの睡眠時間帯が得られるように、計測単位時間は２４時間以内の時間長である。第二の分類方法は、睡眠時に中途半端な時間で起きずに連続して眠ることができる被検者に対して有効である。 The second classification method is a method in which the longest time zone among the time zones in which the formula (25) is satisfied is classified into the sleep time zone, and the time zones other than the sleep time zone are classified into the awakening time zone. Specifically, during the measurement unit time, the longest time zone in which the equation (25) is satisfied is classified into a sleep time zone, and the time zone other than the sleep time zone is classified into an awakening time zone. The measurement unit time is the time length from the start of measurement to the end of measurement. In this method, the longest time zone in which the equation (25) is satisfied is classified into a sleep time zone. Therefore, at this time, the measurement unit time is within 24 hours so that at least one sleep time zone can be obtained in a day. Is the length of time. The second classification method is effective for subjects who can sleep continuously without waking up at halfway time during sleep.
　第三の分類方法は、所定時間以上連続して式（２５）が満足される時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、当該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する方法である。所定時間は、睡眠時以外の状態で臥位になったと推定される時間帯を覚醒時間帯とみなすために設定される時間長である。所定時間は例えば１５分以上、好ましくは３０分以上、より好ましくは１時間以上に設定することができる。第三の分類方法では、細切れに分類された睡眠時間帯を積算することにより実質的な睡眠時間帯を推定するため、睡眠時に中途半端な時間で起きてしまう中途覚醒の不眠症を抱えた被検者に対して有効である。 The third classification method is a method of classifying the time zone in which the formula (25) is satisfied continuously for a predetermined time or more into the sleep time zone, and classifying the time zone other than the sleep time zone into the awakening time zone. The predetermined time is a time length set to consider the time zone estimated to be in the lying position other than the sleeping time as the awakening time zone. The predetermined time can be set to, for example, 15 minutes or more, preferably 30 minutes or more, and more preferably 1 hour or more. In the third classification method, since the actual sleep time zone is estimated by integrating the sleep time zones classified into small pieces, the patient suffering from insomnia of awakening during sleep occurs at halfway time. It is effective for the examiner.
　加速度を用いて覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を分類する場合、当該加速度は、加速度－時間波形に対してモルフォロジー演算を行った後の値であることが好ましい。モルフォロジー演算は、画像処理でノイズ除去のために用いられる。このため、加速度－時間波形に対してモルフォロジー演算を行った後の値を式（２５）に適用すれば、得られた加速度のうち、総計測時間と比較して短時間（例えば、総計測時間の１／１５０時間以内）に変化する値は除去される。このため、加速度－時間波形の全体の輪郭が抽出されて、覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を分類しやすくなる。 When classifying the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone using the acceleration, it is preferable that the acceleration is a value after performing a morphology calculation on the acceleration-time waveform. Morphology operations are used in image processing for denoising. Therefore, if the value after performing the morphology calculation on the acceleration-time waveform is applied to the equation (25), the obtained acceleration is shorter than the total measurement time (for example, the total measurement time). Values that change within 1/150 hours of) are removed. Therefore, the entire contour of the acceleration-time waveform is extracted, and it becomes easy to classify the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone.
　モルフォロジー演算に要する処理時間を短縮するために、所定値Ｄ１をしきい値として２値化処理がなされた加速度－時間波形に対してモルフォロジー演算を行うことも好ましい。２値化処理では、例えば、加速度が所定値（しきい値）Ｄ１以上の場合に加速度を０とみなし、加速度が所定値Ｄ１未満での場合に加速度を１とみなす。 In order to shorten the processing time required for the morphology calculation, it is also preferable to perform the morphology calculation on the acceleration-time waveform that has been binarized with the predetermined value D1 as the threshold value. In the binarization process, for example, when the acceleration is a predetermined value (threshold value) D1 or more, the acceleration is regarded as 0, and when the acceleration is less than the predetermined value D1, the acceleration is regarded as 1.
　モルフォロジー演算は、例えば、線を太くする処理を行う膨張演算、線を細くする処理を行う収縮演算、収縮演算後に膨張演算を行うオープニング処理、膨張演算後に収縮演算を行うクロージング処理がある。モルフォロジー演算後の加速度を用いて覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を分類する場合、モルフォロジー演算が、所定の時間幅で行われるオープニング処理とクロージング処理の少なくともいずれか一方であることが好ましい。また、モルフォロジー演算として、オープニング処理およびクロージング処理の両方を行うことがより好ましい。このように膨張演算と収縮演算を組み合わせることによって、加速度－時間波形の全体の輪郭を抽出しやすくなるため、覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯をより一層分類しやすくなる。 The morphology operation includes, for example, an expansion operation that performs a process of thickening a line, a contraction operation that performs a process of thinning a line, an opening process that performs an expansion operation after a contraction operation, and a closing process that performs a contraction operation after an expansion operation. When classifying the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone using the acceleration after the morphology calculation, it is preferable that the morphology calculation is at least one of the opening process and the closing process performed in a predetermined time width. Further, it is more preferable to perform both the opening process and the closing process as the morphology operation. By combining the expansion calculation and the contraction calculation in this way, it becomes easy to extract the entire outline of the acceleration-time waveform, so that it becomes easier to further classify the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone.
　オープニング処理やクロージング処理を行う回数は特に限定されないが、オープニング処理、クロージング処理をそれぞれ１回以上実施することが好ましく、オープニング処理、クロージング処理をそれぞれ２回以上実施することがより好ましい。 The number of times the opening process and the closing process are performed is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to perform the opening process and the closing process once or more, and it is more preferable to perform the opening process and the closing process twice or more each.
　膨張演算や収縮演算を行う際の時間幅についても適宜設定すればよいが、例えば、１回目のオープニング処理及びクロージング処理の時間幅を２分とし、２回目のオープニング処理およびクロージング処理の時間幅を５分とすることができる。このように処理回数を重ねる毎に、処理時の時間幅を大きくすることが好ましい。このように、オープニング処理およびクロージング処理の時間幅を段階的に大きくすることで、総計測時間と比較して短時間に変化した加速度のデータが除去されるのを抑止する。 The time width for performing the expansion calculation and the contraction calculation may be appropriately set. For example, the time width of the first opening process and the closing process is set to 2 minutes, and the time width of the second opening process and the closing process is set to 2 minutes. It can be 5 minutes. It is preferable to increase the time width during processing each time the processing is repeated in this way. In this way, by gradually increasing the time width of the opening process and the closing process, it is possible to prevent the data of the acceleration that has changed in a short time compared to the total measurement time from being removed.
　うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法は、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含むことが好ましい。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ５　　　　・・・（１３）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ５　　　　　　・・・（１４）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ５　・・・（１５）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ６　　　　・・・（１６）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ６　　　　　　・・・（１７）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ６　・・・（１８）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ７　　　　・・・（１９）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ７　　　　　　・・・（２０）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ７　・・・（２１）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ８　　　　・・・（２２）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ８　　　　　　・・・（２３）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ８　・・・（２４）
　但し、Ａ５～Ａ８、Ｂ５～Ｂ８、Ｃ５～Ｃ８は定数である。 The method for determining depression is a calculation step for calculating the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and the value of the left side is the magnitude relation of the following formulas. It is preferable to include a determination step for determining whether or not the above is satisfied.
[I] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A5 ・ ・ ・ (13)
HF / activity amount <B5 ... (14)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C5 ... (15)
[II] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject over the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A6 ・ ・ ・ (16)
HF / activity amount <B6 ... (17)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C6 ... (18)
[III] In the sleeping hours of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A7 ・ ・ ・ (19)
HF / activity amount <B7 ... (20)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C7 ... (21)
[IV] Pulsation interval / activity amount <A8 ... (22) in the sleep time zone of the second female subject over a predetermined age.
HF / activity amount <B8 ... (23)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C8 ... (24)
However, A5 to A8, B5 to B8, and C5 to C8 are constants.
　被検者の性別と年齢に応じて、睡眠時間帯における上記左辺の値が、各式の大小関係を満足するか否かについても判別することにより、健常者をうつ状態と過って判別してしまう誤判定の発生を低減することができる。以下では、上記式（１３）～（２４）をまとめて第３群の式と呼ぶ場合がある。 By determining whether or not the value on the left side of the sleep time zone satisfies the magnitude relationship of each equation according to the gender and age of the subject, a healthy subject is mistakenly identified as depressed. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of erroneous determination. In the following, the above equations (13) to (24) may be collectively referred to as a third group equation.
　計算ステップでは、第１群の式の左辺と、第２群の式および／または第３群の式の左辺とを計算することが好ましく、第１群の式の左辺と、第２群の式または第３群の式の左辺とを計算することがより好ましく、第１群の式、第２群の式、および第３群の式の左辺を計算することがさらに好ましい。 In the calculation step, it is preferable to calculate the left side of the formula of the first group and the left side of the formula of the second group and / or the formula of the third group, and the left side of the formula of the first group and the formula of the second group. Alternatively, it is more preferable to calculate the left side of the formula of the third group, and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the formula of the first group, the formula of the second group, and the formula of the third group.
　計算ステップでは、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて式（１３）～（２４）の左辺を計算することが好ましい。第３群の式の左辺について、例えば、第１の所定年齢未満の男性の場合には、式（１３）、式（１４）、および式（１５）の左辺のうち少なくとも一つを計算することが好ましく、式（１３）、および式（１４）の左辺を計算することがより好ましく、式（１３）、式（１４）、および式（１５）の左辺を計算することが更に好ましい。また、第１の所定年齢以上の男性の場合には、式（１６）、式（１７）、および式（１８）の左辺のうち少なくとも一つを計算することが好ましく、式（１６）、および式（１７）の左辺を計算することがより好ましく、式（１６）、式（１７）、および式（１８）の左辺を計算することが更に好ましい。また、第２の所定年齢未満の女性の場合には、式（１９）、式（２０）、および式（２１）の左辺のうち少なくとも一つを計算することが好ましく、式（１９）、および式（２０）の左辺を計算することがより好ましく、式（１９）、式（２０）、および式（２１）の左辺を計算することが更に好ましい。また、第２の所定年齢以上の女性の場合には、式（２２）、式（２３）、および式（２４）の左辺のうち少なくとも一つを計算することが好ましく、式（２２）、および式（２３）の左辺を計算することがより好ましく、式（２２）、式（２３）、および式（２４）の左辺を計算することが更に好ましい。 In the calculation step, it is preferable to calculate the left side of the formulas (13) to (24) according to the gender and age of the subject. For the left side of the equation in the third group, for example, in the case of a man under the first predetermined age, calculate at least one of the left side of the equation (13), the equation (14), and the equation (15). It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the formula (13) and the formula (14), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the formula (13), the formula (14), and the formula (15). Further, in the case of a man of the first predetermined age or older, it is preferable to calculate at least one of the left side of the formula (16), the formula (17), and the formula (18), and the formula (16) and the formula (16). It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (17), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the equations (16), (17), and (18). Further, in the case of a second female under a predetermined age, it is preferable to calculate at least one of the left side of the formula (19), the formula (20), and the formula (21), and the formula (19) and the formula (19). It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (20), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the equations (19), (20), and (21). Further, in the case of a woman of a second predetermined age or older, it is preferable to calculate at least one of the left side of the formula (22), the formula (23), and the formula (24), and the formula (22) and the formula (22). It is more preferable to calculate the left side of the equation (23), and it is further preferable to calculate the left side of the equations (22), (23), and (24).
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢未満の男性については、被験者の睡眠時間帯における式（１３）の拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ５の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量が加速度の場合には、Ａ５は４６０００ｍｓであることが好ましく、４１０００ｍｓであることがより好ましく、３６０００ｍｓであることがさらに好ましい。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１３）は（拍動間隔／活動量）／１００＜Ａ５１としてもよい。このときＡ５１は、Ａ５を１００で除した値、つまりＡ５１＝Ａ５／１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the beat interval / activity amount <A5 magnitude relationship of the formula (13) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the first male under a predetermined age. For example, when the amount of activity is acceleration, A5 is preferably 46000 ms, more preferably 41000 ms, and even more preferably 36000 ms. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (13) may be (beat interval / activity amount) / 100 <A51. At this time, A51 is represented by a value obtained by dividing A5 by 100, that is, A51 = A5 / 100.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢未満の男性については、被検者の睡眠時間帯における式（１４）のＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ５の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ５は２６０００ｍｓ2であることが好ましく、２５０００ｍｓ2であることがより好ましく、２４０００ｍｓ2であることがさらに好ましく、２３０００ｍｓ2であることが最も好ましい。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the magnitude relationship of HF / activity amount <B5 of the formula (14) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male under the first predetermined age. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B5 is preferably 26000 ms 2 , preferably 25,000 ms 2 . Is more preferable, 24000 ms 2 is more preferable, and 23000 ms 2 is most preferable.
　他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ５は６２５であることが好ましく、６１５であることがより好ましく、６０５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＢ５の単位は無次元量である。この場合、うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１４）は（ＨＦ／活動量）／１０００＜Ｂ５１としてもよい。このときＢ５１は、Ｂ５を１０００で除した値、つまりＢ５１＝Ｂ５／１０００で表される。 On the other hand, when the integration range of HF obtained from the second power spectrum F is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz by using acceleration as the amount of activity, B5 is preferably 625, more preferably 615. It is preferable, and it is more preferable that it is 605. Here, the unit of B5 is a dimensionless quantity. In this case, the equation (14) may be (HF / activity amount) / 1000 <B51 in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state. At this time, B51 is represented by a value obtained by dividing B5 by 1000, that is, B51 = B5 / 1000.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢未満の男性については、被検者の睡眠時間帯における式（１５）の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ５の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ５は０．０７０であることが好ましく、０．０７５であることがより好ましく、０．０８０であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ５の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１５）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＞Ｃ５１としてもよい。このときＣ５１は、Ｃ５に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ５１＝Ｃ５×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ５は０．０１５であることが好ましく、０．０３０であることがより好ましく、０．０４５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ５の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１５）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＞Ｃ５１としてもよい。このときＣ５１は、Ｃ５に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ５１＝Ｃ５×１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, for a man under the first predetermined age, it is possible to determine whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) × activity amount> C5 of the formula (15) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied. preferable. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity, the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz, and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.070, more preferably 0.075, and even more preferably 0.080. Here, the unit of C5 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (15) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100> C51. At this time, C51 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C5 by 100, that is, C51 = C5 × 100. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of LF obtained from the second power spectrum F is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, C5 is It is preferably 0.015, more preferably 0.030, and even more preferably 0.045. Here, the unit of C5 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (15) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100> C51. At this time, C51 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C5 by 100, that is, C51 = C5 × 100.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢以上の男性については、被験者の睡眠時間帯における式（１６）の拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ６の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量が加速度の場合には、Ａ６は４１０００ｍｓであることが好ましく、３９０００ｍｓであることがより好ましく、３７０００ｍｓであることがさらに好ましい。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１６）は（拍動間隔／活動量）／１００＜Ａ６１としてもよい。このときＡ６１は、Ａ６を１００で除した値、つまりＡ６１＝Ａ６／１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the beat interval / activity amount <A6 magnitude relationship of the formula (16) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male of the first predetermined age or older. For example, when the amount of activity is acceleration, A6 is preferably 41000 ms, more preferably 39000 ms, and even more preferably 37,000 ms. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (16) may be (beat interval / activity amount) / 100 <A61. At this time, A61 is represented by a value obtained by dividing A6 by 100, that is, A61 = A6 / 100.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢以上の男性については、被検者の睡眠時間帯における式（１７）のＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ６の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ６は１８０００ｍｓ2であることが好ましく、１７０００ｍｓ2であることがより好ましく、１６０００ｍｓ2であることがさらに好ましく、１５０００ｍｓ2であることが最も好ましい。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the magnitude relationship of HF / activity amount <B6 of the formula (17) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the male of the first predetermined age or older. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B6 is preferably 18000 ms 2 , preferably 17,000 ms 2 . Is more preferable, 16000 ms 2 is even more preferable, and 15000 ms 2 is most preferable.
　他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ６は５５０であることが好ましく、５４０であることがより好ましく、５３０であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＢ６の単位は無次元量である。この場合、うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、（１７）式は（ＨＦ／活動量）／１０００＜Ｂ６１としてもよい。このときＢ６１は、Ｂ６を１０００で除した値、つまりＢ６１＝Ｂ６／１０００で表される。 On the other hand, when the integration range of HF obtained from the second power spectrum F is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz by using acceleration as the amount of activity, B6 is preferably 550, more preferably 540. It is preferably 530, and more preferably 530. Here, the unit of B6 is a dimensionless quantity. In this case, in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (17) may be (HF / activity amount) / 1000 <B61. At this time, B61 is represented by a value obtained by dividing B6 by 1000, that is, B61 = B6 / 1000.
　判別ステップでは、第１の所定年齢以上の男性については、被検者の睡眠時間帯における式（１８）の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ６の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ６は０．０８であることが好ましく、０．０９であることがより好ましく、０．１０であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ６の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１８）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＞Ｃ６１としてもよい。このときＣ６１は、Ｃ６に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ６１＝Ｃ６×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ６は０．０５６であることが好ましく、０．０５９であることがより好ましく、０．０６２であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ６の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１８）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＞Ｃ６１としてもよい。このときＣ６１は、Ｃ６に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ６１＝Ｃ６×１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, for a man of the first predetermined age or older, it is possible to determine whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) × activity amount> C6 of the formula (18) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied. preferable. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity, the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz, and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.08, more preferably 0.09, and even more preferably 0.10. Here, the unit of C6 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (18) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100> C61. At this time, C61 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C6 by 100, that is, C61 = C6 × 100. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of LF obtained from the second power spectrum F is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, C6 is It is preferably 0.056, more preferably 0.059, and even more preferably 0.062. Here, the unit of C6 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (18) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100> C61. At this time, C61 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C6 by 100, that is, C61 = C6 × 100.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢未満の女性については、被験者の睡眠時間帯における式（１９）の拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ７の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量が加速度の場合には、Ａ７は６１０００ｍｓであることが好ましく、５９０００ｍｓであることがより好ましく、５７０００ｍｓであることがさらに好ましい。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（１９）は（拍動間隔／活動量）／１００＜Ａ７１としてもよい。このときＡ７１は、Ａ７を１００で除した値、つまりＡ７１＝Ａ７／１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the beat interval / activity amount <A7 magnitude relationship of the formula (19) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the second female under a predetermined age. For example, when the amount of activity is acceleration, A7 is preferably 61000 ms, more preferably 59000 ms, and even more preferably 57,000 ms. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (19) may be (beat interval / activity amount) / 100 <A71. At this time, A71 is represented by a value obtained by dividing A7 by 100, that is, A71 = A7 / 100.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢未満の女性については、被検者の睡眠時間帯における式（２０）のＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ７の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ７は３４０００ｍｓ2であることが好ましく、３２０００ｍｓ2であることがより好ましく、３００００ｍｓ2であることがさらに好ましく、２８０００ｍｓ2であることが最も好ましい。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the females under the second predetermined age satisfy the magnitude relationship of HF / activity amount <B7 of the formula (20) in the sleep time zone of the subject. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B7 is preferably 34000 ms 2 and 32000 ms 2 . Is more preferable, 30,000 ms 2 is even more preferable, and 28,000 ms 2 is most preferable.
　他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ７は６５０であることが好ましく、６４０であることがより好ましく、６３０であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＢ７の単位は無次元量である。この場合、うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（２０）は（ＨＦ／活動量）／１０００＜Ｂ７１としてもよい。このときＢ７１は、Ｂ７を１０００で除した値、つまりＢ７１＝Ｂ７／１０００で表される。 On the other hand, when the integration range of HF obtained from the second power spectrum F is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz by using acceleration as the amount of activity, B7 is preferably 650, more preferably 640. It is preferably 630, and even more preferably 630. Here, the unit of B7 is a dimensionless quantity. In this case, the equation (20) may be (HF / activity amount) / 1000 <B71 in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state. At this time, B71 is represented by a value obtained by dividing B7 by 1000, that is, B71 = B7 / 1000.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢未満の女性については、被検者の睡眠時間帯における式（２１）の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ７の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ７は０．０３であることが好ましく、０．０４であることがより好ましく、０．０５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ７の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（２１）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＞Ｃ７１としてもよい。このときＣ７１は、Ｃ７に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ７１＝Ｃ７×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ７は０．０５０であることが好ましく、０．０５３であることがより好ましく、０．０５６であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ７の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（２１）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＞Ｃ７１としてもよい。このときＣ７１は、Ｃ７に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ７１＝Ｃ７×１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, for a woman under the second predetermined age, it is possible to determine whether or not the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) × activity amount> C7 of the formula (21) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied. preferable. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity, the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz, and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.03, more preferably 0.04, and even more preferably 0.05. Here, the unit of C7 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (21) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100> C71. At this time, C71 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C7 by 100, that is, C71 = C7 × 100. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of LF obtained from the second power spectrum F is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, C7 is It is preferably 0.050, more preferably 0.053, and even more preferably 0.056. Here, the unit of C7 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (21) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100> C71. At this time, C71 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C7 by 100, that is, C71 = C7 × 100.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢以上の女性については、被験者の睡眠時間帯における式（２２）の拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ８の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量が加速度の場合には、Ａ８は４３０００ｍｓであることが好ましく、４１０００ｍｓであることがより好ましく、４００００ｍｓであることがさらに好ましい。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（２２）は（拍動間隔／活動量）／１００＜Ａ８１としてもよい。このときＡ８１は、Ａ８を１００で除した値、つまりＡ８１＝Ａ８／１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the beat interval / activity amount <A8 magnitude relationship of the formula (22) in the sleep time zone of the subject is satisfied for the female of the second predetermined age or older. For example, when the amount of activity is acceleration, A8 is preferably 43000 ms, more preferably 41000 ms, and even more preferably 40,000 ms. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (22) may be (beat interval / activity amount) / 100 <A81. At this time, A81 is represented by a value obtained by dividing A8 by 100, that is, A81 = A8 / 100.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢以上の女性については、被検者の睡眠時間帯における式（２３）のＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ８の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ８は２００００ｍｓ2であることが好ましく、１９０００ｍｓ2であることがより好ましく、１８０００ｍｓ2であることがさらに好ましく、１７０００ｍｓ2であることが最も好ましい。 In the discrimination step, it is preferable to discriminate whether or not the female of the second predetermined age or older satisfies the magnitude relationship of HF / activity amount <B8 of the formula (23) in the sleep time zone of the subject. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of HF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, B8 is preferably 20000 ms 2 , preferably 19000 ms 2 . Is more preferable, 18,000 ms 2 is even more preferable, and 17,000 ms 2 is most preferable.
　他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｂ８は５５０であることが好ましく、５２５であることがより好ましく、５００であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＢ８の単位は無次元量である。この場合、うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、（２３）式は（ＨＦ／活動量）／１０００＜Ｂ８１としてもよい。このときＢ８１は、Ｂ８を１０００で除した値、つまりＢ８１＝Ｂ８／１０００で表される。 On the other hand, when the integration range of HF obtained from the second power spectrum F is set to 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz by using acceleration as the amount of activity, B8 is preferably 550, more preferably 525. It is preferably 500, and even more preferably 500. Here, the unit of B8 is a dimensionless quantity. In this case, in order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (23) may be (HF / activity amount) / 1000 <B81. At this time, B81 is represented by a value obtained by dividing B8 by 1000, that is, B81 = B8 / 1000.
　判別ステップでは、第２の所定年齢以上の女性については、被検者の睡眠時間帯における式（２４）の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ８の大小関係を満たすか否か判別することが好ましい。例えば活動量として加速度を用いて、第１のパワースペクトルＦ2から得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ８は０．０４であることが好ましく、０．０５であることがより好ましく、０．０６であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ８の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（２４）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＞Ｃ８１としてもよい。このときＣ８１は、Ｃ８に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ８１＝Ｃ８×１００で表される。他方、活動量として加速度を用いて、第２のパワースペクトルＦから得られるＬＦの積分範囲を０．０４～０．１５Ｈｚ、ＨＦの積分範囲を０．１５Ｈｚ～０．４Ｈｚにした場合、Ｃ８は０．０４９であることが好ましく、０．０５２であることがより好ましく、０．０５５であることがさらに好ましい。ここでＣ８の単位は無次元量である。うつ状態の判定をしやすくするために、式（２４）は（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量×１００＞Ｃ８１としてもよい。このときＣ８１は、Ｃ８に１００を乗じた値、つまりＣ８１＝Ｃ８×１００で表される。 In the discrimination step, it is possible to determine whether or not the female of the second predetermined age or older satisfies the magnitude relationship of (LF / HF) × activity amount> C8 in the formula (24) in the sleep time zone of the subject. preferable. For example, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity, the integration range of LF obtained from the first power spectrum F 2 is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz, and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz. It is preferably 0.04, more preferably 0.05, and even more preferably 0.06. Here, the unit of C8 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (24) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100> C81. At this time, C81 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C8 by 100, that is, C81 = C8 × 100. On the other hand, when acceleration is used as the amount of activity and the integration range of LF obtained from the second power spectrum F is 0.04 to 0.15 Hz and the integration range of HF is 0.15 Hz to 0.4 Hz, C8 is It is preferably 0.049, more preferably 0.052, and even more preferably 0.055. Here, the unit of C8 is a dimensionless quantity. In order to facilitate the determination of the depressed state, the equation (24) may be (LF / HF) × activity amount × 100> C81. At this time, C81 is represented by a value obtained by multiplying C8 by 100, that is, C81 = C8 × 100.
　Ａ５＜Ａ６であることが好ましい。若年層の男性の方が高年層の男性よりも睡眠時間帯の拍動間隔／活動量の値が小さくなり易いため、Ａ５＜Ａ６とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that A5 <A6. Since young men tend to have smaller beat intervals / activity values during sleep hours than older men, setting A5 <A6 improves the accuracy of determining depression.
　Ａ７＞Ａ８であることが好ましい。若年層の女性の方が高年層の女性よりも睡眠時間帯の拍動間隔／活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ａ７＞Ａ８とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that A7> A8. Since young women are more likely to have a larger value of pulsation interval / activity during sleep time than older women, setting A7> A8 improves the accuracy of determining depression.
　Ｂ５＞Ｂ６であることが好ましい。若年層の男性の方が高年層の男性よりも睡眠時間帯のＨＦ／活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ｂ５＞Ｂ６とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that B5> B6. Since young men are more likely to have a larger HF / activity value during sleep than older men, setting B5> B6 improves the accuracy of determining depression.
　Ｂ７＞Ｂ８であることが好ましい。若年層の女性の方が高年層の女性よりも睡眠時間帯のＨＦ／活動量の値が大きくなり易いため、Ｂ７＞Ｂ８とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that B7> B8. Since young women are more likely to have a larger HF / activity value during sleep than older women, setting B7> B8 improves the accuracy of determining depression.
　Ｃ５＜Ｃ６であることが好ましい。若年層の男性の方が高年層の男性よりも睡眠時間帯の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量の値が小さくなり易いため、Ｃ５＜Ｃ６とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that C5 <C6. Since younger men are more likely to have a smaller value of (LF / HF) x activity during sleep time than older men, setting C5 <C6 improves the accuracy of determining depression. do.
　Ｃ７＜Ｃ８であることが好ましい。若年層の女性の方が高年層の女性よりも睡眠時間帯の（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量の値が小さくなり易いため、Ｃ７＜Ｃ８とすることにより、うつ状態の判別の精度が向上する。 It is preferable that C7 <C8. Since young women tend to have a smaller value of (LF / HF) x activity during sleep time than older women, setting C7 <C8 improves the accuracy of determining depression. do.
　Ａ５＜Ａ６、Ａ７＞Ａ８、Ｂ５＞Ｂ６、Ｂ７＞Ｂ８、Ｃ５＜Ｃ６、及びＣ７＜Ｃ８のうち少なくとも一つの大小関係を満たすことが好ましく、Ａ５＜Ａ６、Ａ７＞Ａ８、Ｂ５＞Ｂ６、及びＢ７＞Ｂ８のうち少なくとも一つの大小関係を満たすことが好ましく、Ａ５＜Ａ６、Ａ７＞Ａ８、Ｂ５＞Ｂ６、及びＢ７＞Ｂ８の大小関係を満たすことがより好ましく、Ａ５＜Ａ６、Ａ７＞Ａ８、Ｂ５＞Ｂ６、Ｂ７＞Ｂ８、Ｃ５＜Ｃ６、及びＣ７＜Ｃ８の大小関係を満たすことが更に好ましい。 It is preferable to satisfy at least one magnitude relationship of A5 <A6, A7> A8, B5> B6, B7> B8, C5 <C6, and C7 <C8, and A5 <A6, A7> A8, B5> B6, and It is preferable to satisfy at least one magnitude relationship of B7> B8, and more preferably to satisfy the magnitude relationship of A5 <A6, A7> A8, B5> B6, and B7> B8, A5 <A6, A7> A8, It is more preferable to satisfy the magnitude relationship of B5> B6, B7> B8, C5 <C6, and C7 <C8.
　被験者毎に、上記第１群の式である式（１）～（４）のうちの少なくとも一つの式に加えて、上記第３群の性別と年齢に応じた式（１３）～（２４）のうちの少なくとも一つの式の大小関係を満たす場合に、うつ状態であると判定してもよい。上記第３群の式（１３）～（２４）の条件を加えることにより、健常者をうつ状態と判別してしまう誤判定の発生を低減することができる。また被験者毎に、上記第１群の式である式（１）～（４）のうちの少なくとも一つの式に加えて、上記第２群の性別と年齢に応じた式（５）～（１２）のうちの少なくとも一つの式、及び上記第３群の性別と年齢に応じた式（１３）～（２４）のうちの少なくとも一つの式の大小関係を満たす場合に、うつ状態であると判定してもよい。 For each subject, in addition to at least one of the formulas (1) to (4) which are the formulas of the first group, the formulas (13) to (24) according to the gender and age of the third group. If the magnitude relation of at least one of the equations is satisfied, it may be determined that the patient is depressed. By adding the conditions of the above-mentioned third group equations (13) to (24), it is possible to reduce the occurrence of erroneous determination that a healthy person is determined to be in a depressed state. Further, for each subject, in addition to at least one of the formulas (1) to (4) which are the formulas of the first group, the formulas (5) to (12) according to the gender and age of the second group. ), And at least one of the formulas (13) to (24) according to the gender and age of the third group, it is determined to be depressed. You may.
　うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法は、うつ状態の判別結果を被検者等に通知する通知ステップを含んでいてもよい。通知方法は、音声、静止画、動画などが挙げられる。被検者に判別結果を通知することにより、医療機関への受診等が促進される。 The determination method for determining a depressed state may include a notification step for notifying the subject or the like of the determination result of the depressed state. Examples of the notification method include voice, still image, and moving image. By notifying the subject of the discrimination result, consultation with a medical institution or the like is promoted.
　これらのうつ状態であると判定するための判別方法は、例えば以下に詳述するうつ状態判定システム等を用いて実施することができる。上記判別方法の各ステップの少なくとも一部のステップは、被験者、操作者等により実行されてもよく、計測ステップ、計算ステップ、及び判別ステップが下記のうつ状態判定システムにより実行されることが好ましく、計測ステップ、計算ステップ、判別ステップ、及び通知ステップが下記のうつ状態判定システムにより実行されることがより好ましい。なお全ステップが下記うつ状態判定システムにより実行されてもよい。 The determination method for determining these depression states can be carried out using, for example, the depression state determination system described in detail below. At least a part of each step of the above discrimination method may be executed by a subject, an operator, or the like, and it is preferable that the measurement step, the calculation step, and the discrimination step are executed by the following depression state determination system. It is more preferable that the measurement step, the calculation step, the discrimination step, and the notification step are executed by the following depression state determination system. All steps may be executed by the following depression state determination system.
　２．うつ状態判定システム
　うつ状態判定システムは、被検者の拍動間隔と、被検者の動きに伴う加速度または角速度（以下、「活動量」と記載する）とを計測する計測部と、拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換するステップを含んで得たパワースペクトルを定積分して、ＬＦおよびＨＦを算出する処理部と、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式の左辺を計算し、左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に被検者がうつ状態であると判定する判定部と、を備える。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ１　・・・（１）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ２　・・・（２）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ３　・・・（３）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ４　・・・（４）
　但し、第１の所定年齢と第２の所定年齢は、それぞれ３３歳～３７歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であり、Ｃ１～Ｃ４は定数である。 2. 2. Depression state determination system The depression state determination system has a measuring unit that measures the beat interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity (hereinafter referred to as "activity amount") that accompanies the movement of the subject, and the beat. The processing unit that calculates LF and HF by constant integration of the power spectrum obtained including the step of converting the interval to the frequency spectrum, and the left side of the following formula are calculated according to the gender and age of the subject, and the left side is calculated. It is provided with a determination unit for determining that the subject is in a depressed state when the value satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following equation.
[I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
(LF / HF) / Activity> C1 ・ ・ ・ (1)
[II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
(LF / HF) x activity amount <C2 ... (2)
[III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
(LF / HF) / Activity> C3 ・ ・ ・ (3)
[IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
(LF / HF) x activity amount <C4 ... (4)
However, the first predetermined age and the second predetermined age are each one of 33 to 37 years old, and C1 to C4 are constants.
　上記の通り、うつ状態判定システムは、計測部と、処理部と、判定部とを備える。計測部は、例えば、被検者の心拍を計測する心電計や心拍センサ、または被検者の脈波を計測して脈拍を求める脈波センサと、被検者の活動量を計測する加速度センサまたは角速度センサ等である。処理部は、計測部により計測された拍動間隔に基づき、周波数スペクトル変換を行い、パワースペクトル積分値を算出し、うつ状態の判定に用いるＬＦ及びＨＦを算出する。判定部は、計測部で計測された活動量等、及び処理部で得られたＬＦ及びＨＦを用いて、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて判定データを作成して、定数Ｃ１～Ｃ４等の所定値と判定データを比較することによりうつ状態の判定を行う。処理部及び判定部を構成する装置としては、うつ状態の判定に用いる判定データの作成や、所定値と判定用データの比較等を行うソフトウェアを搭載するコンピュータや計測機器等の解析機が挙げられる。 As described above, the depression state determination system includes a measurement unit, a processing unit, and a determination unit. The measuring unit is, for example, an electrocardiograph or heart rate sensor that measures the heartbeat of the subject, a pulse wave sensor that measures the pulse wave of the subject to obtain the pulse, and an acceleration that measures the activity amount of the subject. A sensor, an angular velocity sensor, or the like. The processing unit performs frequency spectrum conversion based on the pulsation interval measured by the measurement unit, calculates the power spectrum integral value, and calculates the LF and HF used for determining the depression state. The judgment unit creates judgment data according to the gender and age of the subject using the activity amount measured by the measurement unit and the LF and HF obtained by the processing unit, and constants C1 to C4 and the like. Depression is determined by comparing the predetermined value of the above with the determination data. Examples of the device constituting the processing unit and the determination unit include an analyzer such as a computer or a measuring device equipped with software for creating determination data used for determining a depressed state and comparing a predetermined value with the determination data. ..
　判定部は、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算し、左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に被検者がうつ状態であると判定するように制御されていることが好ましい。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ１　　　　・・・（５）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ１　　　　　　・・・（６）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ２　　　　・・・（７）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ２　　　　　　・・・（８）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ３　　　　・・・（９）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ３　　　　　　・・・（１０）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ４　　　　・・・（１１）
　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ４　　　　　　・・・（１２）
　但し、Ａ１～Ａ４、Ｂ１～Ｂ４は定数である。 The determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and the subject is depressed when the value on the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula. It is preferable that it is controlled so as to determine.
[I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
Beat interval x activity <A1 ... (5)
HF x activity amount <B1 ... (6)
[II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
Beat interval x activity <A2 ・ ・ ・ (7)
HF x activity amount <B2 ... (8)
[III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
Beat interval x activity <A3 ・ ・ ・ (9)
HF x activity amount <B3 ... (10)
[IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
Beat interval x activity <A4 ・ ・ ・ (11)
HF x activity amount <B4 ... (12)
However, A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 are constants.
　上記式（５）～（１２）の詳細については、「１．うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法」の記載を参照することができる。 For details of the above equations (5) to (12), the description of "1. Depressive state determination method" can be referred to.
　判定部は、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算し、左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に被検者がうつ状態であると判定するように制御されていることが好ましい。
［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ５　　　　・・・（１３）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ５　　　　　　・・・（１４）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ５　・・・（１５）
［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ６　　　　・・・（１６）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ６　　　　　　・・・（１７）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ６　・・・（１８）
［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ７　　　　・・・（１９）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ７　　　　　　・・・（２０）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ７　・・・（２１）
［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ８　　　　・・・（２２）
　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ８　　　　　　・・・（２３）
　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ８　・・・（２４）
　但し、Ａ５～Ａ８、Ｂ５～Ｂ８、Ｃ５～Ｃ８は定数である。 The determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and the subject is depressed when the value on the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula. It is preferable that it is controlled so as to determine.
[I] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A5 ・ ・ ・ (13)
HF / activity amount <B5 ... (14)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C5 ... (15)
[II] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject over the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A6 ・ ・ ・ (16)
HF / activity amount <B6 ... (17)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C6 ... (18)
[III] In the sleeping hours of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A7 ・ ・ ・ (19)
HF / activity amount <B7 ... (20)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C7 ... (21)
[IV] In the sleeping hours of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
Pulsation interval / activity <A8 ・ ・ ・ (22)
HF / activity amount <B8 ... (23)
(LF / HF) x activity amount> C8 ... (24)
However, A5 to A8, B5 to B8, and C5 to C8 are constants.
　上記式（１３）～（２４）の詳細については、「１．うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法」の記載を参照することができる。以下では、うつ状態判定システムの実施の形態１～６について説明する。 For details of the above equations (13) to (24), the description of "1. Depressive state determination method" can be referred to. Hereinafter, embodiments 1 to 6 of the depression state determination system will be described.
　（実施の形態１）
　図２は、実施の形態１に係るうつ状態判定システム１の構成を示すブロック図である。図２に示すうつ状態判定システム１は、計測部を構成するセンサ１０と、解析機５０とを備える。 (Embodiment 1)
FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 1 according to the first embodiment. The depression state determination system 1 shown in FIG. 2 includes a sensor 10 constituting a measurement unit and an analyzer 50.
　（１）計測部
　センサ１０は、拍動間隔を検出する拍動計測部１２と、活動量を検出する活動量計測部１３とから構成される計測部１１を備える。センサ１０は、小型軽量であり、本体裏面の電極（図示せず）を被検者の胸部に密着させた状態で、被検者の肌に本体ごと取りつけることができる。これにより、センサ１０は服の下に隠れ目立たなくなる。 (1) Measurement unit The sensor 10 includes a measurement unit 11 including a pulsation measurement unit 12 that detects a pulsation interval and an activity amount measurement unit 13 that detects an activity amount. The sensor 10 is small and lightweight, and can be attached to the skin of the subject together with the main body in a state where the electrodes (not shown) on the back surface of the main body are in close contact with the chest of the subject. As a result, the sensor 10 is hidden under the clothes and becomes inconspicuous.
　うつ状態判定システムは、拍動間隔として、心電信号におけるＲ波とＲ波との間隔であるＲＲ間隔（ＲＲＩ）を用いることが好ましい。ＲＲＩは信号のピークがはっきり出ることにより拍動間隔の精度が高くなるため、ピーク位置の誤認識が起こりにくい。なお、本実施の形態においては、拍動間隔としてＲＲＩを、活動量として加速度を計測することが好ましい。 The depression state determination system preferably uses the RR interval (RRI), which is the interval between the R waves in the electrocardiographic signal, as the pulsation interval. In RRI, since the peak of the signal appears clearly, the accuracy of the pulsation interval is improved, so that erroneous recognition of the peak position is unlikely to occur. In this embodiment, it is preferable to measure RRI as the pulsation interval and acceleration as the amount of activity.
　拍動計測部１２は、電極を被検者の胸部に密着させた状態で心電信号を計測し、この心電信号に基づきＲＲＩを算出して解析機５０へ送信する。なお、センサ１０の拍動計測部１２が心電信号に基づきＲＲＩを算出したが、ＲＲＩの算出は後述する処理部５１で行われてもよい。 The pulsation measuring unit 12 measures the electrocardiographic signal with the electrodes in close contact with the chest of the subject, calculates the RRI based on the electrocardiographic signal, and transmits it to the analyzer 50. Although the pulsation measuring unit 12 of the sensor 10 calculates the RRI based on the electrocardiographic signal, the calculation of the RRI may be performed by the processing unit 51 described later.
　拍動計測部１２では、心拍を測定する代わりに脈波を測定してもよい。脈波は、人の指先や耳たぶ等に波長が７００ｎｍ～１２００ｎｍの近赤外線を照射し、近赤外線の反射量を接触あるいは非接触で測定することができる。脈波を測定する場合は、比較的測定器を体に取り付け易いという利点があり、特に非接触で測定するタイプを使用した場合には、測定器を体に取り付ける煩わしさがなくなるので、広く普及する可能性がある。このように測定した脈波の隣り合うピーク同士の間隔から脈拍間隔を求めることができる。 The pulsation measuring unit 12 may measure the pulse wave instead of measuring the heart rate. The pulse wave can be measured by irradiating a human fingertip, earlobe, or the like with near-infrared rays having a wavelength of 700 nm to 1200 nm, and measuring the amount of near-infrared rays reflected in contact or non-contact. When measuring pulse waves, there is an advantage that it is relatively easy to attach the measuring instrument to the body, and especially when using a non-contact type, the trouble of attaching the measuring instrument to the body is eliminated, so it is widely used. there's a possibility that. The pulse interval can be obtained from the interval between adjacent peaks of the pulse wave measured in this way.
　計測部１１の活動量計測部１３では、例えば被検者のＸ軸、Ｙ軸、Ｚ軸方向における加速度を計測して解析機５０へ送信する。加速度を計測するセンサの種類は特に限定されず、例えば、ピエゾ抵抗体型加速度センサ、圧電型加速度センサ、静電容量型加速度センサなどを用いることができる。ピエゾ抵抗体型加速度センサは、半導体を用いているため小型で量産化がしやすい。圧電型加速度センサは、比較的高い加速度の検出がしやすい。静電容量型加速度センサはピエゾ抵抗体型加速度センサに比べて高感度で、検出可能な加速度の範囲が広く、温度依存性も小さい。 The activity measuring unit 13 of the measuring unit 11 measures, for example, the acceleration in the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis directions of the subject and transmits it to the analyzer 50. The type of the sensor that measures the acceleration is not particularly limited, and for example, a piezo resistor type acceleration sensor, a piezoelectric type acceleration sensor, a capacitance type acceleration sensor, or the like can be used. Since the piezo resistor type accelerometer uses a semiconductor, it is small and easy to mass-produce. Piezoelectric accelerometers are easy to detect relatively high acceleration. Capacitive accelerometers are more sensitive than piezo-resistor accelerometers, have a wider range of detectable accelerations, and are less temperature dependent.
　活動量として、加速度の代わりに角速度を検出してもよい。角速度を計測するセンサの種類は特に限定されず、例えば、回転型、振動型、ガス型、光ファイバー型、リングレーザー型の角速度センサを用いることができる。 Angular velocity may be detected instead of acceleration as the amount of activity. The type of the sensor for measuring the angular velocity is not particularly limited, and for example, a rotary type, a vibration type, a gas type, an optical fiber type, and a ring laser type angular velocity sensor can be used.
　計測部１１で計測された拍動間隔及び活動量のデータを解析機５０の受信部５２に送信する方法として、無線通信を用いてもよいし、有線通信を用いてもよい。特に無線通信でデータを送受する場合は、内蔵するバッテリーの持ちを向上させるために、例えば３個分のＲＲＩをまとめて送信する等により送受信の頻度を下げることが好ましい。また、このとき活動量である加速度はＲＲＩと同じタイミングで送受することが好ましい。 As a method of transmitting the beat interval and activity data measured by the measuring unit 11 to the receiving unit 52 of the analyzer 50, wireless communication may be used or wired communication may be used. In particular, when data is transmitted / received by wireless communication, it is preferable to reduce the frequency of transmission / reception by, for example, transmitting three RRIs at once in order to improve the life of the built-in battery. Further, at this time, it is preferable that the acceleration, which is the amount of activity, is transmitted and received at the same timing as the RRI.
　消費電力を抑制する観点から、センサは電源をＯＮ状態にしてから所定時間経過した後、自動的に電源がＯＦＦ状態になることが好ましい。所定時間はうつ状態の判定に必要なデータ数を考慮して設定すればよく、例えば２４時間や４８時間などに設定することができる。 From the viewpoint of suppressing power consumption, it is preferable that the sensor automatically turns off after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. The predetermined time may be set in consideration of the number of data required for determining the depression state, and may be set to, for example, 24 hours or 48 hours.
　（２）処理部
　解析機５０は、処理部５１と判定部８１を備え、処理部５１は受信部５２、周波数スペクトル変換部５５、パワースペクトル積分算出部５６を備える。受信部５２では、センサ１０から送信されるＲＲＩと活動量を受信する。 (2) Processing unit The analyzer 50 includes a processing unit 51 and a determination unit 81, and the processing unit 51 includes a receiving unit 52, a frequency spectrum conversion unit 55, and a power spectrum integration calculation unit 56. The receiving unit 52 receives the RRI and the activity amount transmitted from the sensor 10.
　周波数スペクトル変換部５５では、ＦＦＴ等の周波数スペクトル変換方法を用いて、受信部５２から送信された時間信号であるＲＲＩを周波数スペクトルに変換する。次に、パワースペクトル積分算出部５６では、周波数スペクトル変換部５５で得られたスペクトルからパワースペクトルを算出して、所定の周波数範囲で積分を行うことにより、ＬＦ及びＨＦを求める。具体的には、以下のような処理が行われる。まず、周波数スペクトル変換部５５で得られた周波数スペクトルからパワースペクトルを算出すると、縦軸がパワースペクトル密度、横軸が周波数の分布図が得られる。次に、Ｌｆ１～Ｌｆ２の範囲、及びＨｆ１～Ｈｆ２の範囲でパワースペクトルを積分することにより、ＬＦとＨＦをそれぞれ求める。なお、好ましくはＬｆ１＜Ｈｆ１、Ｌｆ２＜Ｈｆ２である。なお、パワースペクトルの具体的な算出方法は、「１．うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法」で述べたとおりであり、パワースペクトルとして、例えば第１のパワースペクトルＦ2を用いてもよく、第２のパワースペクトルＦを用いてもよい。 The frequency spectrum conversion unit 55 converts the RRI, which is a time signal transmitted from the reception unit 52, into a frequency spectrum by using a frequency spectrum conversion method such as FFT. Next, the power spectrum integration calculation unit 56 calculates the power spectrum from the spectrum obtained by the frequency spectrum conversion unit 55 and performs integration in a predetermined frequency range to obtain LF and HF. Specifically, the following processing is performed. First, when the power spectrum is calculated from the frequency spectrum obtained by the frequency spectrum conversion unit 55, a power spectrum density is obtained on the vertical axis and a frequency distribution map is obtained on the horizontal axis. Next, LF and HF are obtained by integrating the power spectra in the range of Lf1 to Lf2 and the range of Hf1 to Hf2, respectively. It should be noted that Lf1 <Hf1 and Lf2 <Hf2 are preferable. The specific calculation method of the power spectrum is as described in "1. Discrimination method for determining a depressed state", and even if the first power spectrum F 2 is used as the power spectrum, for example. Often, the second power spectrum F may be used.
　（３）判定部
　うつ状態判定システムの判定部８１は、判定データ作成部８２と、所定値格納部８３と、比較部８４を備える。まず、判定データ作成部８２では、被検者の性別と年齢に応じて、うつ状態の判定に用いる式（１）～式（４）のうちのいずれか一つの左辺の算出に必要な判定データを作成する。活動量は、処理部５１の受信部５２から送信されて、ＨＦ及びＬＦは処理部５１のパワースペクトル積分算出部５６から判定部８１の判定データ作成部８２に送信される。これらのデータを乗除することにより式（１）～式（４）のうちのいずれか一つの左辺に記載される判定データを作成する。判定データ作成部８２は、例えば後述する入力部から性別、年齢を取得して、性別、年齢に応じて式（１）～式（４）のうちのいずれか一つの左辺を選択して、左辺の値を算出することができる。なお式（５）の左辺等を測定する場合は、ＲＲＩ等は、処理部５１の受信部５２から判定部８１の判定データ作成部８２に送信される。 (3) Determination unit The determination unit 81 of the depression state determination system includes a determination data creation unit 82, a predetermined value storage unit 83, and a comparison unit 84. First, the determination data creation unit 82 determines the determination data required for calculating the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) used for determining the depressed state according to the gender and age of the subject. To create. The activity amount is transmitted from the receiving unit 52 of the processing unit 51, and the HF and LF are transmitted from the power spectrum integration calculation unit 56 of the processing unit 51 to the determination data creating unit 82 of the determination unit 81. By multiplying and dividing these data, the determination data described on the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) is created. The determination data creation unit 82 acquires the gender and age from, for example, an input unit described later, selects the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) according to the gender and age, and selects the left side of the equation (1) to the equation (4). The value of can be calculated. When measuring the left side of the equation (5), the RRI or the like is transmitted from the receiving unit 52 of the processing unit 51 to the determination data creating unit 82 of the determination unit 81.
　所定値格納部８３にはうつ状態の判定に用いる式（１）～式（４）の右辺に記載される定数Ｃ１～Ｃ４等の所定値が格納されている。所定値格納部８３は、所定値を被検者の性別、年齢毎に適宜変更することができるように制御されていることが好ましい。例えば、所定値格納部８３は、例えば後述する入力部から性別、年齢に応じた所定値を取得することがより好ましい。 The predetermined value storage unit 83 stores predetermined values such as constants C1 to C4 described on the right side of the equations (1) to (4) used for determining the depression state. It is preferable that the predetermined value storage unit 83 is controlled so that the predetermined value can be appropriately changed for each gender and age of the subject. For example, it is more preferable that the predetermined value storage unit 83 acquires a predetermined value according to gender and age from, for example, an input unit described later.
　比較部８４では、判定データ作成部８２で作成された判定用データ（例えば式（１）～式（４）のうちのいずれか一つの左辺のデータ）と、所定値格納部８３に格納されている所定値（例えば式（１）～式（４）のうちのいずれか一つの右辺のデータ）を式に代入して、左辺と右辺の大小を比較し、式の大小関係を満足するか判定する。大小関係を満足する場合はうつ状態であると判定し、満足しない場合にはうつ状態ではないと判定する。 In the comparison unit 84, the determination data created by the determination data creation unit 82 (for example, the data on the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4)) and the predetermined value storage unit 83 are stored. Substituting a predetermined value (for example, the data on the right side of any one of the equations (1) to (4)) into the equation, comparing the magnitude of the left side and the right side, and determining whether the magnitude relation of the equation is satisfied. do. If the magnitude relationship is satisfied, it is determined to be depressed, and if not satisfied, it is determined not to be depressed.
　解析機５０は、被験者の性別、年齢、所定値等を入力するための入力部を有することが好ましい。これにより、判定データ作成部８２が、性別、年齢に応じて式（１）～式（４）のうちのいずれか一つの左辺を選択して、左辺の値を算出することができる。またこれにより、所定値格納部８３は、例えば後述する入力部から性別、年齢に応じた所定値を取得することができる。入力部としては、ボタン、タッチパネル、キーボード等が挙げられる。 It is preferable that the analyzer 50 has an input unit for inputting the gender, age, predetermined value, etc. of the subject. As a result, the determination data creation unit 82 can select the left side of any one of the equations (1) to (4) according to the gender and age, and calculate the value on the left side. Further, as a result, the predetermined value storage unit 83 can acquire a predetermined value according to gender and age from, for example, an input unit described later. Examples of the input unit include buttons, a touch panel, a keyboard, and the like.
　解析機５０は、判定部８１からうつ状態の判定結果を被検者等に通知する通知部９１を有することが好ましい。通知方法は、音声、静止画、動画など特に限定されない。医師やカウンセラーなどの専門家、被検者やその家族等、通知対象者の専門知識レベルに応じて通知内容を変えることも可能である。ここではうつ状態判定システム１に通知部９１が設けられる例を示したが、うつ状態判定システム１とは別の通知用機器に判定結果を送信し、被検者等へ結果を通知してもよい。通知用機器としては、例えば外付けモニタ、携帯電話、スマートフォン、タブレット端末、スピーカー、イヤホンなどが挙げられる。 It is preferable that the analyzer 50 has a notification unit 91 that notifies the subject or the like of the determination result of the depressed state from the determination unit 81. The notification method is not particularly limited, such as voice, still image, and moving image. It is also possible to change the content of the notification according to the level of expertise of the person to be notified, such as a specialist such as a doctor or counselor, the subject or his / her family. Here, an example in which the notification unit 91 is provided in the depression state determination system 1 is shown, but even if the determination result is transmitted to a notification device different from the depression state determination system 1 and the result is notified to the subject or the like. good. Examples of the notification device include an external monitor, a mobile phone, a smartphone, a tablet terminal, a speaker, an earphone, and the like.
（実施の形態２）
　図３は、実施の形態２に係るうつ状態判定システム２の構成を示すブロック図である。図３に示すうつ状態判定システム２は、センサ１０と、解析機６０とを備える。なお、実施の形態１のうつ状態判定システム１と同様の構成要素には同一の番号を付し、その説明を省略する。 (Embodiment 2)
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 2 according to the second embodiment. The depression state determination system 2 shown in FIG. 3 includes a sensor 10 and an analyzer 60. The same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
　解析機６０は、処理部６１と、判定部８１を備え、処理部６１は、受信部６２、異常値検出部６３、異常値除去部６４、周波数スペクトル変換部６５、パワースペクトル積分算出部６６を含む。 The analyzer 60 includes a processing unit 61 and a determination unit 81, and the processing unit 61 includes a receiving unit 62, an outlier detection unit 63, an outlier removal unit 64, a frequency spectrum conversion unit 65, and a power spectrum integration calculation unit 66. include.
　異常値検出部６３は、受信部６２から出力されたＲＲＩ及び活動量が、異常値とみなすべきものであるか否かを判断する。ＲＲＩが異常値とみなすべきものであるか否かは次のように判断する。実施の形態２では、ＲＲＩ（秒単位）の逆数を６０倍して瞬時心拍数を算出し、１拍分前の瞬時心拍数との差の絶対値が第１の所定数（本実施の形態では、「１８」とする）以下である直近の複数点（本実施の形態では、「８点」とする）における平均を算出する。次に当該平均と評価対象のＲＲＩに対応する瞬時心拍数との差の絶対値が第２の所定数（本実施の形態では「３５」とする）以上である場合に、評価対象のＲＲＩを異常値とみなす。ここで、第１の所定数は３０が好ましく、より好ましくは２０、さらに好ましくは１５である。また、第２の所定数は５０が好ましく、より好ましくは４０、さらに好ましくは３０である。 The outlier detection unit 63 determines whether or not the RRI and activity amount output from the reception unit 62 should be regarded as outliers. Whether or not RRI should be regarded as an outlier is determined as follows. In the second embodiment, the reciprocal of RRI (in seconds) is multiplied by 60 to calculate the instantaneous heart rate, and the absolute value of the difference from the instantaneous heart rate one beat before is the first predetermined number (the present embodiment). Then, the average at the most recent plurality of points (in the present embodiment, "8 points"), which is "18" or less) or less, is calculated. Next, when the absolute value of the difference between the average and the instantaneous heart rate corresponding to the RRI to be evaluated is equal to or greater than the second predetermined number (“35” in the present embodiment), the RRI to be evaluated is determined. Considered as an outlier. Here, the first predetermined number is preferably 30, more preferably 20, and even more preferably 15. The second predetermined number is preferably 50, more preferably 40, and even more preferably 30.
　なお、第１の所定数、第２の所定数、直近の複数点の数を、個人差等に応じて適宜変更してもよい。例えば、第１の所定数を３０以下、第２の所定数を３０以上、直近の複数点の数を４～２０の範囲内で適宜変更してもよい。 The first predetermined number, the second predetermined number, and the number of the latest plurality of points may be appropriately changed according to individual differences and the like. For example, the first predetermined number may be 30 or less, the second predetermined number may be 30 or more, and the number of the latest plurality of points may be appropriately changed within the range of 4 to 20.
　活動量については、活動量がマイナスの値になっているときには異常値とみなしてもよい。 The amount of activity may be regarded as an abnormal value when the amount of activity is a negative value.
　異常値除去部６４は、異常値検出部６３により異常値とみなされたＲＲＩを周波数スペクトル変換部６５におけるデータ処理の対象から除外する。また、異常値除去部６４は、異常値検出部６３により異常値とみなされたＲＲＩ及び活動量を判定データ作成部８２におけるデータ処理の対象から除外する。 The outlier removing unit 64 excludes the RRI regarded as an outlier by the outlier detecting unit 63 from the data processing target in the frequency spectrum conversion unit 65. Further, the outlier removing unit 64 excludes the RRI and the activity amount regarded as outliers by the outlier detecting unit 63 from the data processing targets in the determination data creating unit 82.
　（実施の形態３）
　図４は、実施の形態３に係るうつ状態判定システム３の構成を示すブロック図である。図４に示すうつ状態判定システム３は、センサ２０と、解析機５０とを備える。なお、実施の形態１のうつ状態判定システム１と同様の構成要素には同一の番号を付し、その説明を省略する。 (Embodiment 3)
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 3 according to the third embodiment. The depression state determination system 3 shown in FIG. 4 includes a sensor 20 and an analyzer 50. The same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
　センサ２０の計測部２１には、拍動計測部２２と、活動量計測部２３に加えて、覚醒状態または睡眠状態を入力する入力手段２４が設けられることが好ましい。これにより、覚醒時間帯の開始時と睡眠時間帯の開始時に被検者が自ら入力手段２４を操作することにより、覚醒情報及び睡眠情報を得ることができる。入力手段２４とは、例えば、センサの表面に設けられたスイッチであり、このスイッチはボタン型でもよく、レバー型でもよく、その方式は特に限定されない。 It is preferable that the measurement unit 21 of the sensor 20 is provided with an input means 24 for inputting a wakefulness state or a sleep state in addition to the pulsation measurement unit 22 and the activity amount measurement unit 23. As a result, the subject can obtain the awakening information and the sleep information by operating the input means 24 by himself / herself at the start of the awakening time zone and the start of the sleeping time zone. The input means 24 is, for example, a switch provided on the surface of the sensor, and the switch may be a button type or a lever type, and the method is not particularly limited.
　入力手段２４はうつ状態判定システム３のセンサ２０ではなく、解析機５０に設けられることも好ましい。これにより、センサ２０に入力手段２４が設けられる場合に比べて、睡眠時の寝返りなどに伴って被検者が無意識のうちに入力手段２４を操作することを防止することができる。 It is also preferable that the input means 24 is provided in the analyzer 50 instead of the sensor 20 of the depression state determination system 3. This makes it possible to prevent the subject from unknowingly operating the input means 24 due to turning over during sleep or the like, as compared with the case where the input means 24 is provided in the sensor 20.
（実施の形態４）
　図５は、実施の形態４に係るうつ状態判定システム４の構成を示すブロック図である。図５に示すうつ状態判定システム４は、センサ３０と、解析機５０とを備える。なお、実施の形態１のうつ状態判定システム１と同様の構成要素には同一の番号を付し、その説明を省略する。 (Embodiment 4)
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 4 according to the fourth embodiment. The depression state determination system 4 shown in FIG. 5 includes a sensor 30 and an analyzer 50. The same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
　センサ３０の計測部３１には、拍動計測部３２と、活動量計測部３３に加えて、体温計測部３４となる体温計測手段が設けられることが好ましい。うつ状態の場合は低体温になりやすいことが知られている。うつ状態では夜型の生活になりやすくなり、日の光を浴びる機会が減少するため、体内時計を正常に合わせることが困難になるためである。さらに、うつ状態の患者は夜間であっても体温が高いため、身体が休まらない状態になり易い。このため、体温計測手段（体温計測部３４）により体温データを取得して、上記式（１）～式（４）によるうつ状態の判定と組み合わせることにより、うつ状態の判定精度をさらに向上させることができる。 It is preferable that the measurement unit 31 of the sensor 30 is provided with a body temperature measuring unit serving as a body temperature measuring unit 34 in addition to the pulsation measuring unit 32 and the activity amount measuring unit 33. It is known that people who are depressed tend to have hypothermia. This is because in a depressed state, it becomes easier to have a night-owl life, and the chances of being exposed to the sun are reduced, making it difficult to set the body clock normally. In addition, depressed patients tend to be restless because their body temperature is high even at night. Therefore, by acquiring the body temperature data by the body temperature measuring means (body temperature measuring unit 34) and combining it with the determination of the depressed state by the above equations (1) to (4), the determination accuracy of the depressed state is further improved. Can be done.
　一般に体温は口腔、腋下、鼓膜など環境温度による影響が小さい身体の深部で測定されるが、うつ状態判定システムの計測部は、心拍や脈波を測定するために被検者の肌に取りつけられるものであるため、深部体温を直接計測することは困難である。したがって、ここでの体温とは深部体温だけではなく、体表面温も含むものとする。また、体温を直接測定せずに計測部を構成する部材、例えばセンサの基板の温度を測定することも可能である。被検者の体温が上昇すればセンサの基板温度も上昇するため、センサの基板温度を測定すれば相対的に体温の変化を計測することができる。体温計測手段は温度センサであればその種類は特に限定されず、例えば白金、ニッケル、銅などの金属測温抵抗体、熱電対、サーミスタ、ＩＣ化温度センサ、水晶温度計などを用いることができる。 Generally, body temperature is measured in the deep part of the body, such as the oral cavity, axilla, and eardrum, where the influence of environmental temperature is small. Therefore, it is difficult to directly measure the core body temperature. Therefore, the body temperature here includes not only the core body temperature but also the body surface temperature. It is also possible to measure the temperature of a member constituting the measuring unit, for example, the substrate of a sensor, without directly measuring the body temperature. Since the substrate temperature of the sensor also rises as the body temperature of the subject rises, it is possible to measure the relative change in body temperature by measuring the substrate temperature of the sensor. The type of body temperature measuring means is not particularly limited as long as it is a temperature sensor, and for example, metal resistance temperature detectors such as platinum, nickel, and copper, thermocouples, thermistors, IC temperature sensors, crystal thermometers, and the like can be used. ..
　（実施の形態５）
　図６は、実施の形態５に係るうつ状態判定システム５の構成を示すブロック図である。図６に示すうつ状態判定システム５は、センサ４０と、解析機７０とを備える。なお、実施の形態１のうつ状態判定システム１と同様の構成要素には同一の番号を付し、その説明を省略する。 (Embodiment 5)
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 5 according to the fifth embodiment. The depression state determination system 5 shown in FIG. 6 includes a sensor 40 and an analyzer 70. The same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
　センサ４０には、拍動計測部４２と活動量計測部４３から構成される計測部４１で取得した生体情報を一時的に保存するデータ保存部４４が設けられることが好ましい。センサ４０で取得したデータを逐次的に解析機７０に送信してデータを処理する必要がないため、データ通信によって消費する電力量を抑制することができる。例えば、被検者が自宅でセンサを用いて計測を行い、後日、医療機関にある解析機を用いて医師がうつ状態であるか否かを判定する場合などに適している。 It is preferable that the sensor 40 is provided with a data storage unit 44 that temporarily stores biometric information acquired by the measurement unit 41 including the pulsation measurement unit 42 and the activity amount measurement unit 43. Since it is not necessary to sequentially transmit the data acquired by the sensor 40 to the analyzer 70 to process the data, it is possible to suppress the amount of power consumed by the data communication. For example, it is suitable for a case where a subject makes a measurement at home using a sensor and later determines whether or not the doctor is depressed by using an analyzer in a medical institution.
　解析機７０の処理部７１は、周波数スペクトル変換及びパワースペクトル積分を行うためにデータ保存部４４に保存されたＲＲＩのデータを読み出す。判定部８１では、データ保存部４４から読み出したＲＲＩ及び活動量のデータと、周波数スペクトル変換部７５及びパワースペクトル積分算出部７６で算出されたＬＦ及びＨＦを用いてうつ状態の判定を行う。なお、小型軽量なセンサを得るために、データ保存部４４には公知の半導体メモリを用いることが好ましい。 The processing unit 71 of the analyzer 70 reads out the RRI data stored in the data storage unit 44 in order to perform frequency spectrum conversion and power spectrum integration. The determination unit 81 determines the depression state using the RRI and activity data read from the data storage unit 44 and the LF and HF calculated by the frequency spectrum conversion unit 75 and the power spectrum integration calculation unit 76. In order to obtain a compact and lightweight sensor, it is preferable to use a known semiconductor memory for the data storage unit 44.
　（実施の形態６）
　図７は、実施の形態６に係るうつ状態判定システム６の構成を示すブロック図である。図７に示すうつ状態判定システム６は、センサ１０と、解析機１００とを備える。なお、実施の形態１のうつ状態判定システム１と同様の構成要素には同一の番号を付し、その説明を省略する。 (Embodiment 6)
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the depression state determination system 6 according to the sixth embodiment. The depression state determination system 6 shown in FIG. 7 includes a sensor 10 and an analyzer 100. The same components as those of the depression state determination system 1 of the first embodiment are assigned the same numbers, and the description thereof will be omitted.
　センサ１０の計測部１１の活動量計測部１３ではＸ、Ｙ、Ｚ軸のうちいずれか１軸が身長方向の加速度と一致している。これは、身長方向の加速度の値を用いて覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯の分類を行うためである。 In the activity amount measuring unit 13 of the measuring unit 11 of the sensor 10, any one of the X, Y, and Z axes coincides with the acceleration in the height direction. This is to classify the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone using the value of the acceleration in the height direction.
　解析機１００は、処理部１０１と、判定部８１を備え、処理部１０１は、受信部１０２、周波数スペクトル変換部１０５、パワースペクトル積分算出部１０６、モルフォロジー演算部１０７を含む。 The analyzer 100 includes a processing unit 101 and a determination unit 81, and the processing unit 101 includes a receiving unit 102, a frequency spectrum conversion unit 105, a power spectrum integration calculation unit 106, and a morphology calculation unit 107.
　モルフォロジー演算部１０７では、受信部１０２から出力された負加速度－時間波形のノイズを除去するために負加速度－時間波形に対してモルフォロジー演算を行う。ここでモルフォロジー演算としては上述したように、例えば、膨張演算、収縮演算、オープニング処理、クロージング処理、これらの組み合わせを適用することができる。なお、図７には示していないが、処理部１０１には、モルフォロジー演算部１０７での処理前に、所定値Ｄ１をしきい値として負加速度の値の大きさを二値化する二値化処理部を設けることもできる。二値化処理部では、例えば、負加速度ＴがＤ１以上であれば負加速度Ｔは０とみなされ、負加速度ＴがＤ１未満であれば１とみなされる。このように、モルフォロジー演算に先立って、加速度に対して二値化処理を行うことにより、モルフォロジー演算に要する処理時間を短縮することができる。所定値Ｄ１の値は特に制限されないが、例えば－０．８５ｇであることが好ましく、－０．８ｇであることがより好ましく、－０．７５ｇであることがさらに好ましい（ここで単位ｇは重力加速度の大きさを表す）。 The morphology calculation unit 107 performs a morphology calculation on the negative acceleration-time waveform in order to remove the noise of the negative acceleration-time waveform output from the reception unit 102. Here, as the morphology operation, as described above, for example, an expansion operation, a contraction operation, an opening process, a closing process, and a combination thereof can be applied. Although not shown in FIG. 7, the processing unit 101 is binarized to binarize the magnitude of the negative acceleration value with the predetermined value D1 as the threshold value before the processing by the morphology calculation unit 107. A processing unit can also be provided. In the binarization processing unit, for example, if the negative acceleration T is D1 or more, the negative acceleration T is regarded as 0, and if the negative acceleration T is less than D1, it is regarded as 1. In this way, the processing time required for the morphology calculation can be shortened by performing the binarization process for the acceleration prior to the morphology calculation. The value of the predetermined value D1 is not particularly limited, but is preferably -0.85 g, more preferably -0.8 g, and even more preferably -0.75 g (where the unit g is gravity). Represents the magnitude of acceleration).
　判定部８１では、処理部１０１のモルフォロジー演算部１０７で処理された負加速度Ｔの値を所定値Ｄ１と比較して、式（２５）が満足される時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、式（２５）が満足されない時間帯を覚醒時間帯に分類する。
　Ｔ≧Ｄ１・・・（２５）
　但し、Ｄ１は定数である。 The determination unit 81 compares the value of the negative acceleration T processed by the morphology calculation unit 107 of the processing unit 101 with the predetermined value D1, classifies the time zone in which the equation (25) is satisfied into the sleep time zone, and formulates the equation. The time zone in which (25) is not satisfied is classified into the awakening time zone.
T ≧ D1 ... (25)
However, D1 is a constant.
　ここでは単に式（２５）を用いて覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を分類する第一の分類方法を用いて説明したが、上述したように、式（２５）が満足される時間帯のうち最長の時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する方法（第二の分類方法）や、所定時間以上連続して式（２５）が満足される時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、当該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する方法（第三の分類方法）を用いることが可能である。 Here, the explanation was made using the first classification method for classifying the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone simply by using the formula (25), but as described above, the longest time zone in which the formula (25) is satisfied. A method of classifying the time zone into a sleep time zone and classifying the time zone other than the sleep time zone into an awakening time zone (second classification method), or a time zone in which the equation (25) is continuously satisfied for a predetermined time or longer. It is possible to use a method of classifying into a sleeping time zone and classifying other than the sleeping time zone into an awakening time zone (third classification method).
　処理部、判定部、及び通知部は、解析機の構成単位であることが好ましいが、これらのうち少なくとも一つが他の機器の構成単位であってもよい。各部は、中央処理装置（ＣＰＵ）、マイクロプロセッサ（ＭＰＵ）等のプロセッサ、ＲＡＭ（Random Access Memory）、ＲＯＭ（Read Only Memory）等の記憶媒体、ＦＰＧＡ（Field Programmable Gate Array）、ＬＳＩ（Large Scale Integration）、ＡＳＩＣ（Application Specific Integrated Circuit）等の論理回路これらの一部または全部等から構成されていてもよい。また解析機は、ＨＤＤ（Hard　Disk　Drive）やフラッシュメモリ等の補助記憶装置、ＣＤ－ＲＯＭ、ＤＶＤディスク、ＵＳＢメモリ等の可搬型の記録媒体を有していてもよい。 The processing unit, determination unit, and notification unit are preferably unit of the analyzer, but at least one of them may be the unit of the other device. Each part includes a central processing unit (CPU), a processor such as a microprocessor (MPU), a storage medium such as RAM (RandomAccessMemory) and ROM (ReadOnlyMemory), FPGA (FieldProgrammableGateArray), and LSI (LargeScaleIntegration). ), ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), etc. Logic circuit It may be composed of a part or all of these. Further, the analyzer may have an auxiliary storage device such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) or a flash memory, or a portable recording medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD disk, or a USB memory.
　本願は、２０２０年１２月２２日に出願された日本国特許出願第２０２０－２１２２２２号に基づく優先権の利益を主張するものである。２０２０年１２月２２日に出願された日本国特許出願第２０２０－２１２２２２号の明細書の全内容が、本願に参考のため援用される。 This application claims the benefit of priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-21222 filed on December 22, 2020. The entire contents of the specification of Japanese Patent Application No. 2020-21222 filed on December 22, 2020 are incorporated herein by reference.
　（検証）
　精神系の医療機関に通院していない健常者８４人と、双極性障害または大うつ病患者と医師に診断され医療機関に通院している患者５７人を被験者として、実施の形態１のうつ状態判定システム１の有用性についての検証を行った。 (inspection)
The depressive state of Embodiment 1 with 84 healthy subjects who did not go to a psychiatric medical institution and 57 patients who were diagnosed by a doctor as a patient with bipolar disorder or major depression and went to a medical institution. The usefulness of the determination system 1 was verified.
　まず被験者を健常者と患者に分け、更に男性と女性に分け、更に３５歳未満と３５歳以上に分けて、最終的に表１、２に示す通り８群（ＭＰ１群、ＭＰ２群、ＦＰ１群、ＦＰ２群、ＭＨ１群、ＭＨ２群、ＦＨ１群、ＦＨ２群）に分けた。 First, the subjects were divided into healthy subjects and patients, further divided into males and females, and further divided into those under 35 years old and those over 35 years old, and finally 8 groups (MP1 group, MP2 group, FP1 group) as shown in Tables 1 and 2. , FP2 group, MH1 group, MH2 group, FH1 group, FH2 group).
　次いで、被験者に対して一人ずつうつ状態判定システム１の小型の心電計を４８時間、装着させて、覚醒時間帯及び睡眠時間帯におけるＲＲＩ（単位：ｍｓ）と活動量（加速度）（単位：無次元量）を測定した。心電計で測定したＲＲＩを周波数スペクトル変換して、得られた第１のパワースペクトルＦ2（単位：ｍｓ2／Ｈｚ）についてパワースペクトル積分を行うことによりＬＦ及びＨＦ（単位：ｍｓ2）を算出した。そして得られたＲＲＩ、活動量、ＬＦ及びＨＦ／ＬＦの値を、うつ状態であると判定するための判別方法の式（１）～（４）等に適用して、各式を満足するか判別した。なお、本検証においてＣ１、Ｃ２、Ｃ３、Ｃ４等の定数（所定値）は表１、２の通り、うつ状態判定システム１に設定し、ＬＦ及びＨＦの積分範囲はＬｆ１＝０．０４Ｈｚ、Ｌｆ２＝０．１５Ｈｚ、Ｈｆ１＝０．１５Ｈｚ、Ｈｆ２＝０．４Ｈｚとした。また、覚醒時間帯及び睡眠時間帯の分類は、第一の分類方法を用い、定数Ｄ１は、－０．７５とした。 Next, each subject was made to wear a small electrocardiograph of the depression state determination system 1 for 48 hours, and RRI (unit: ms) and activity amount (acceleration) (unit:) in the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone. Dimensionless quantity) was measured. LF and HF (unit: ms 2 ) are obtained by frequency spectrum conversion of RRI measured by an electrocardiograph and power spectrum integration for the obtained first power spectrum F 2 (unit: ms 2 / Hz). Calculated. Then, whether the obtained RRI, activity amount, LF and HF / LF values are applied to the formulas (1) to (4) of the discrimination method for determining the depressed state to satisfy each formula. Determined. In this verification, constants (predetermined values) such as C1, C2, C3, and C4 are set in the depression state determination system 1 as shown in Tables 1 and 2, and the integration range of LF and HF is Lf1 = 0.04Hz, Lf2. = 0.15 Hz, Hf1 = 0.15 Hz, Hf2 = 0.4 Hz. The first classification method was used for the classification of the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone, and the constant D1 was set to −0.75.
　次いで、医療機関が双極性障害または大うつ病患者と診断したＭＰ１群、ＭＰ２群、ＦＰ１群、ＦＰ２群の被験者のうち、うつ状態判定システム１が上記第１群の式（１）～（４）のいずれかを満たすと判別した被験者の割合を算出した。即ち、双極性障害または大うつ病患者に罹患している患者をうつ状態と判別する正判定率を算出した。その結果を表１に示す。 Next, among the subjects in the MP1 group, MP2 group, FP1 group, and FP2 group diagnosed by the medical institution as a patient with bipolar disorder or major depression, the depression state determination system 1 is the above-mentioned first group equations (1) to (4). ) Was determined to satisfy any of the above. That is, the correct judgment rate for discriminating a patient suffering from bipolar disorder or major depression as a depressed state was calculated. The results are shown in Table 1.
　その結果、男性、３５歳未満、患者のＭＰ１群については、表１に示す通り被験者の８８．９％が式（１）を満たした。 As a result, 88.9% of the subjects satisfied the formula (1) as shown in Table 1 for the MP1 group of males, under 35 years old, and patients.
　男性、３５歳以上、患者のＭＰ２群については、表１に示す通り、被験者の６４．７％が式（１）を満たした。一方、ＭＰ２群では、被験者の７６．５％が式（２）を満たした。このようにＭＰ２群において、式（２）により正判定率を向上できることが分かった。 As shown in Table 1, 64.7% of the subjects satisfied the formula (1) for the MP2 group of males, 35 years old or older, and patients. On the other hand, in the MP2 group, 76.5% of the subjects satisfied the formula (2). As described above, it was found that the correct judgment rate can be improved by the equation (2) in the MP2 group.
　女性、３５歳未満、患者のＦＰ１群については、表１に示す通り被験者の７１．４％が式（３）を満たした。 For the FP1 group of females, under 35 years old, and patients, 71.4% of the subjects satisfied the formula (3) as shown in Table 1.
　女性、３５歳以上、患者のＦＰ２群については、表１に示す通り、被験者の３５．３％が式（３）を満たした。一方、ＦＰ２群では、被験者の６４．７％が式（４）を満たした。このようにＦＰ２群において、式（４）により正判定率を向上できることが分かった。 As shown in Table 1, 35.3% of the subjects satisfied the formula (3) for the FP2 group of females, 35 years old and over, and patients. On the other hand, in the FP2 group, 64.7% of the subjects satisfied the formula (4). As described above, it was found that the correct judgment rate can be improved by the equation (4) in the FP2 group.
　更に、健常者のＭＨ１群、ＭＨ２群、ＦＨ１群、ＦＨ２群のうち、うつ状態判定システム１が上記第１群の式（１）～（４）のいずれかを満たすと判別した被験者の割合を算出した。即ち、健常者をうつ状態と判別してしまう誤判定率を算出した。その結果を表２に示す。 Further, among the MH1 group, MH2 group, FH1 group, and FH2 group of healthy subjects, the proportion of subjects who are determined that the depression state determination system 1 satisfies any of the formulas (1) to (4) of the first group. Calculated. That is, the erroneous judgment rate for discriminating a healthy person as a depressed state was calculated. The results are shown in Table 2.
　その結果、男性、３５歳未満、健常者のＭＨ１群については、表２に示す通り被験者の３５％が式（１）を満たした。 As a result, for the MH1 group of males, under 35 years old, and healthy subjects, 35% of the subjects satisfied the formula (1) as shown in Table 2.
　男性、３５歳以上、健常者のＭＨ２群については、表２に示す通り、被験者の５７．９％が式（１）を満たした。一方、ＭＨ２群では、被験者の４２．１％が式（２）を満たした。このようにＭＨ２群において、式（２）により誤判定率を低減できることが分かった。 As shown in Table 2, 57.9% of the subjects satisfied the formula (1) in the MH2 group of males, 35 years old or older, and healthy subjects. On the other hand, in the MH2 group, 42.1% of the subjects satisfied the formula (2). As described above, it was found that the erroneous determination rate can be reduced by the equation (2) in the MH2 group.
　女性、３５歳未満、健常者のＦＨ１群については、表２に示す通り被験者の３１．６％が式（３）を満たした。 For the FH1 group of females, under 35 years old, and healthy subjects, 31.6% of the subjects satisfied formula (3) as shown in Table 2.
　女性、３５歳以上、健常者のＦＨ２群については、表２に示す通り、被験者の５７．７％が式（３）を満たした。一方、ＦＨ２群では、被験者の４６．２％が式（４）を満たした。このようにＦＨ２群において、式（４）により誤判定率を低減できることが分かった。 As shown in Table 2, 57.7% of the subjects satisfied the formula (3) in the FH2 group of females, 35 years old or older, and healthy subjects. On the other hand, in the FH2 group, 46.2% of the subjects satisfied the formula (4). As described above, it was found that the erroneous determination rate can be reduced by the equation (4) in the FH2 group.
　更に、健常者のＭＨ１群、ＭＨ２群、ＦＨ１群、ＦＨ２群のうち、うつ状態判定システム１が上記第１群の式および上記第２群の式、または上記第１群の式および上記第３群の式を満たすと判別した被験者の割合を算出した。その結果、いずれの群においても、上記第１群の式である式（１）～（４）に加えて、上記第２群の式である式（５）～（１２）、または上記第３群の式である式（１３）～（２４）を用いることにより、誤判定率を低減することができた。 Further, among the MH1 group, MH2 group, FH1 group, and FH2 group of healthy subjects, the depression state determination system 1 is the formula of the first group and the formula of the second group, or the formula of the first group and the third group. The proportion of subjects who were determined to satisfy the group formula was calculated. As a result, in any of the groups, in addition to the formulas (1) to (4) of the first group, the formulas (5) to (12) of the second group, or the third formula. By using the formulas (13) to (24) of the group, the erroneous judgment rate could be reduced.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000007
１～６：うつ状態判定システム
１０、２０、３０、４０：センサ
１１、２１、３１、４１：計測部
１２、２２、３２、４２：拍動計測部
１３、２３、３３、４３：活動量計測部
２４：入力手段、３４：体温計測部、４４：データ保存部
５０、６０、７０、１００：解析機
５１、６１、７１、１０１：処理部
５２、６２、１０２：受信部
５５、６５、７５、１０５：周波数スペクトル変換部
５６、６６、７６、１０６：パワースペクトル積分算出部 
６３：異常値検出部、６４：異常値除去部
８１：判定部、８２：判定データ作成部、８３：所定値格納部、８４：比較部
９１：通知部
１０７：モルフォロジー演算部 1 to 6: Depression state determination system 10, 20, 30, 40: Sensor 11, 21, 31, 41: Measurement unit 12, 22, 32, 42: Pulsation measurement unit 13, 23, 33, 43: Activity measurement Unit 24: Input means, 34: Body temperature measurement unit, 44: Data storage unit 50, 60, 70, 100: Analyzer 51, 61, 71, 101: Processing unit 52, 62, 102: Receiver unit 55, 65, 75 , 105: Frequency spectrum conversion unit 56, 66, 76, 106: Power spectrum integration calculation unit
63: Outlier detection unit, 64: Outlier removal unit 81: Judgment unit, 82: Judgment data creation unit, 83: Predetermined value storage unit, 84: Comparison unit 91: Notification unit 107: Morphology calculation unit

Claims (17)

  1. 　被検者がうつ状態であると判定するために、
    　前記被検者の拍動間隔と、前記被検者の動きに伴う加速度または角速度（以下、「活動量」と記載する）とを計測する計測ステップ、
    　前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び
    　前記左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含む判別方法。
    ［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ１　・・・（１）
    ［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ２　・・・（２）
    ［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ３　・・・（３）
    ［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ４　・・・（４）
    　但し、前記第１の所定年齢と前記第２の所定年齢は、それぞれ３３歳～３７歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であり、
    　ＬＦ、ＨＦは、拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換するステップを含んで得たパワースペクトルを定積分して得た値であり、
    　Ｃ１～Ｃ４は定数である。     To determine that the subject is depressed
    A measurement step for measuring the pulsatile interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity (hereinafter referred to as "activity amount") accompanying the movement of the subject.
    A determination method including a calculation step of calculating the left side of the following formula according to the gender and age of the subject, and a determination step of determining whether or not the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula.
    [I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
    (LF / HF) / Activity> C1 ・ ・ ・ (1)
    [II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
    (LF / HF) x activity amount <C2 ... (2)
    [III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
    (LF / HF) / Activity> C3 ・ ・ ・ (3)
    [IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
    (LF / HF) x activity amount <C4 ... (4)
    However, the first predetermined age and the second predetermined age are each one of 33 to 37 years old.
    LF and HF are values obtained by definitely integrating the power spectra obtained by including the step of converting the beat interval into the frequency spectrum.
    C1 to C4 are constants.
  2. 　Ｃ１＞Ｃ３、Ｃ２＞Ｃ４である請求項１に記載の判別方法。 The determination method according to claim 1, wherein C1> C3 and C2> C4.
  3. 　前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び
    　前記左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含む請求項１または２に記載の判別方法。
    ［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ１　　　　・・・（５）
    　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ１　　　　　　・・・（６）
    ［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ２　　　　・・・（７）
    　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ２　　　　　　・・・（８）
    ［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ３　　　　・・・（９）
    　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ３　　　　　　・・・（１０）
    ［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ４　　　　・・・（１１）
    　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ４　　　　　　・・・（１２）
    　但し、Ａ１～Ａ４、Ｂ１～Ｂ４は定数である。     A calculation step for calculating the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and a determination step for determining whether or not the value on the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula. The determination method according to claim 1 or 2, which comprises.
    [I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
    Beat interval x activity <A1 ... (5)
    HF x activity amount <B1 ... (6)
    [II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
    Beat interval x activity <A2 ・ ・ ・ (7)
    HF x activity amount <B2 ... (8)
    [III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
    Beat interval x activity <A3 ・ ・ ・ (9)
    HF x activity amount <B3 ... (10)
    [IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
    Beat interval x activity <A4 ・ ・ ・ (11)
    HF x activity amount <B4 ... (12)
    However, A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 are constants.
  4. 　Ａ１＞Ａ２、Ａ３＞Ａ４、Ｂ１＞Ｂ２、Ｂ３＞Ｂ４である請求項３に記載の判別方法。 The determination method according to claim 3, wherein A1> A2, A3> A4, B1> B2, and B3> B4.
  5. 　前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算する計算ステップ、及び
    　前記左辺の値が、下記式の大小関係を満足するか否かを判別する判別ステップを含む請求項１～４のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。
    ［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
    　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ５　　　　・・・（１３）
    　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ５　　　　　　・・・（１４）
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ５　・・・（１５）
    ［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
    　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ６　　　　・・・（１６）
    　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ６　　　　　　・・・（１７）
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ６　・・・（１８）
    ［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
    　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ７　　　　・・・（１９）
    　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ７　　　　　　・・・（２０）
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ７　・・・（２１）
    ［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
    　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ８　　　　・・・（２２）
    　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ８　　　　　　・・・（２３）
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ８　・・・（２４）
    　但し、Ａ５～Ａ８、Ｂ５～Ｂ８、Ｃ５～Ｃ８は定数である。     A calculation step for calculating the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and a determination step for determining whether or not the value on the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula. The determination method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, which comprises.
    [I] Pulsation interval / activity amount <A5 ... (13) in the sleep time zone of the first male subject under a predetermined age.
    HF / activity amount <B5 ... (14)
    (LF / HF) x activity amount> C5 ... (15)
    [II] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject over the prescribed age,
    Pulsation interval / activity <A6 ・ ・ ・ (16)
    HF / activity amount <B6 ... (17)
    (LF / HF) x activity amount> C6 ... (18)
    [III] In the sleeping hours of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
    Pulsation interval / activity <A7 ・ ・ ・ (19)
    HF / activity amount <B7 ... (20)
    (LF / HF) x activity amount> C7 ... (21)
    [IV] In the sleeping hours of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
    Pulsation interval / activity <A8 ・ ・ ・ (22)
    HF / activity amount <B8 ... (23)
    (LF / HF) x activity amount> C8 ... (24)
    However, A5 to A8, B5 to B8, and C5 to C8 are constants.
  6. 　Ａ５＜Ａ６、Ａ７＞Ａ８、Ｂ５＞Ｂ６、Ｂ７＞Ｂ８、Ｃ５＜Ｃ６、Ｃ７＜Ｃ８である請求項５に記載の判別方法。 The determination method according to claim 5, wherein A5 <A6, A7> A8, B5> B6, B7> B8, C5 <C6, C7 <C8.
  7. 　前記覚醒時間帯および前記睡眠時間帯として、被検者の姿勢に伴う加速度を計測し、該加速度と所定値を比較することによって分類された覚醒時間帯と睡眠時間帯を用いる請求項５または６に記載の判別方法。 Claim 5 or 6 using the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone classified by measuring the acceleration associated with the posture of the subject and comparing the acceleration with a predetermined value as the awakening time zone and the sleeping time zone. The discrimination method described in.
  8. 　前記加速度は、被検者の姿勢に伴う身長方向の加速度である請求項１～７のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。 The discrimination method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the acceleration is an acceleration in the height direction accompanying the posture of the subject.
  9. 　前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が正の値の場合は、前記身長方向の加速度に－１を乗算した値を負加速度Ｔとし、
    　前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が負の値の場合は、前記負の値を負加速度Ｔとし、
    　下記（２５）式が満足される時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、下記（２５）式が満足されない時間帯を覚醒時間帯に分類する請求項８に記載の判別方法。
    　負加速度Ｔ≧Ｄ１・・・（２５）
    　但し、Ｄ１は定数である。     When the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject is standing is a positive value, the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1 is defined as the negative acceleration T.
    When the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject is standing is a negative value, the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T.
    The determination method according to claim 8, wherein the time zone in which the following equation (25) is satisfied is classified into a sleep time zone, and the time zone in which the following equation (25) is not satisfied is classified into an awakening time zone.
    Negative acceleration T ≧ D1 ... (25)
    However, D1 is a constant.
  10. 　前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が正の値の場合は、前記身長方向の加速度に－１を乗算した値を負加速度Ｔとし、
    　前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が負の値の場合は、前記負の値を負加速度Ｔとし、
    　下記（２５）式が満足される時間帯のうち最長の時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する請求項８に記載の判別方法。
    　負加速度Ｔ≧Ｄ１・・・（２５）
    　但し、Ｄ１は定数である。     When the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject is standing is a positive value, the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1 is defined as the negative acceleration T.
    When the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject is standing is a negative value, the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T.
    The determination method according to claim 8, wherein the longest time zone among the time zones in which the following equation (25) is satisfied is classified into a sleep time zone, and the time zone other than the sleep time zone is classified into an awakening time zone.
    Negative acceleration T ≧ D1 ... (25)
    However, D1 is a constant.
  11. 　前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が正の値の場合は、前記身長方向の加速度に－１を乗算した値を負加速度Ｔとし、　前記被検者の立位時に計測された前記身長方向の加速度が負の値の場合は、前記負の値を負加速度Ｔとし、
    　所定時間以上連続して下記（２５）式が満足される時間帯を睡眠時間帯に分類し、該睡眠時間帯以外を覚醒時間帯に分類する請求項８に記載の判別方法。
    　負加速度Ｔ≧Ｄ１・・・（２５）
    　但し、Ｄ１は定数である。     When the acceleration in the height direction measured when the subject stands up is a positive value, the value obtained by multiplying the acceleration in the height direction by -1 is defined as the negative acceleration T, and when the subject stands up. If the measured acceleration in the height direction is a negative value, the negative value is defined as the negative acceleration T.
    The determination method according to claim 8, wherein a time zone in which the following equation (25) is satisfied continuously for a predetermined time or longer is classified into a sleep time zone, and a time zone other than the sleep time zone is classified into an awakening time zone.
    Negative acceleration T ≧ D1 ... (25)
    However, D1 is a constant.
  12. 　前記加速度は、加速度－時間波形に対してモルフォロジー演算を行った後の値である請求項１～１１のいずれか１項に記載の判別方法。 The determination method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the acceleration is a value after performing a morphology calculation on an acceleration-time waveform.
  13. 　前記モルフォロジー演算が、所定の時間幅で行われるオープニング処理とクロージング処理の少なくともいずれか一方である請求項１２に記載の判別方法。 The determination method according to claim 12, wherein the morphology calculation is at least one of an opening process and a closing process performed in a predetermined time width.
  14. 　被検者の拍動間隔と、被検者の動きに伴う加速度または角速度（以下、「活動量」と記載する）とを計測する計測部と、
    　前記拍動間隔を周波数スペクトル変換するステップを含んで得たパワースペクトルを定積分して、ＬＦおよびＨＦを算出する処理部と、
    　前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式の左辺を計算し、前記左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に前記被検者がうつ状態であると判定する判定部と、を備えることを特徴とするうつ状態判定システム。
    ［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ１　・・・（１）
    ［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ２　・・・（２）
    ［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）／活動量＞Ｃ３　・・・（３）
    ［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＜Ｃ４　・・・（４）
    　但し、前記第１の所定年齢と前記第２の所定年齢は、それぞれ３３歳～３７歳のうちいずれか一つの年齢であり、Ｃ１～Ｃ４は定数である。     A measuring unit that measures the pulsatile interval of the subject and the acceleration or angular velocity (hereinafter referred to as "activity amount") that accompanies the movement of the subject.
    A processing unit that calculates LF and HF by definitely integrating the power spectrum obtained including the step of converting the beat interval into a frequency spectrum.
    A determination unit that calculates the left side of the following formula according to the gender and age of the subject and determines that the subject is depressed when the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula. Depression state determination system characterized by being equipped with.
    [I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
    (LF / HF) / Activity> C1 ・ ・ ・ (1)
    [II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
    (LF / HF) x activity amount <C2 ... (2)
    [III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
    (LF / HF) / Activity> C3 ・ ・ ・ (3)
    [IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
    (LF / HF) x activity amount <C4 ... (4)
    However, the first predetermined age and the second predetermined age are each one of 33 to 37 years old, and C1 to C4 are constants.
  15. 　前記判定部は、前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算し、前記左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に前記被検者がうつ状態であると判定するように制御されている請求項１４に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
    ［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ１　　　　・・・（５）
    　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ１　　　　　　・・・（６）
    ［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ２　　　　・・・（７）
    　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ２　　　　　　・・・（８）
    ［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
    　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ３　　　　・・・（９）
    　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ３　　　　　　・・・（１０）
    ［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性　被検者の覚醒時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔×活動量＜Ａ４　　　　・・・（１１）
    　ＨＦ×活動量＜Ｂ４　　　　　　・・・（１２）
    　但し、Ａ１～Ａ４、Ｂ１～Ｂ４は定数である。     The determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and when the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula, the subject determines. The depression state determination system according to claim 14, wherein the depression state is determined to be determined.
    [I] In the awakening time of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
    Beat interval x activity <A1 ... (5)
    HF x activity amount <B1 ... (6)
    [II] In the awakening time zone of the first male subject over a predetermined age,
    Beat interval x activity <A2 ・ ・ ・ (7)
    HF x activity amount <B2 ... (8)
    [III] In the awakening time of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
    Beat interval x activity <A3 ・ ・ ・ (9)
    HF x activity amount <B3 ... (10)
    [IV] In the awakening time zone of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
    Beat interval x activity <A4 ・ ・ ・ (11)
    HF x activity amount <B4 ... (12)
    However, A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 are constants.
  16. 　前記判定部は、前記被検者の性別と年齢に応じて下記式のうち少なくとも一つの式の左辺を計算し、前記左辺の値が下記式の大小関係を満足する場合に前記被検者がうつ状態であると判定するように制御されている請求項１４または１５に記載のうつ状態判定システム。
    ［Ｉ］第１の所定年齢未満の男性
    　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ５　　　　・・・（１３）
    　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ５　　　　　　・・・（１４）
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ５　・・・（１５）
    ［ＩＩ］第１の所定年齢以上の男性
    　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ６　　　　・・・（１６）
    　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ６　　　　　　・・・（１７）
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ６　・・・（１８）
    ［ＩＩＩ］第２の所定年齢未満の女性
    　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ７　　　　・・・（１９）
    　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ７　　　　　　・・・（２０）
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ７　・・・（２１）
    ［ＩＶ］第２の所定年齢以上の女性
    　被検者の睡眠時間帯における、
    　拍動間隔／活動量＜Ａ８　　　　・・・（２２）
    　ＨＦ／活動量＜Ｂ８　　　　　　・・・（２３）
    　（ＬＦ／ＨＦ）×活動量＞Ｃ８　・・・（２４）
    　但し、Ａ５～Ａ８、Ｂ５～Ｂ８、Ｃ５～Ｃ８は定数である。     The determination unit calculates the left side of at least one of the following formulas according to the gender and age of the subject, and when the value of the left side satisfies the magnitude relationship of the following formula, the subject determines. The depression determination system according to claim 14 or 15, which is controlled to determine that the patient is depressed.
    [I] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject under the prescribed age,
    Pulsation interval / activity <A5 ・ ・ ・ (13)
    HF / activity amount <B5 ... (14)
    (LF / HF) x activity amount> C5 ... (15)
    [II] In the sleeping hours of the first male subject over the prescribed age,
    Pulsation interval / activity <A6 ・ ・ ・ (16)
    HF / activity amount <B6 ... (17)
    (LF / HF) x activity amount> C6 ... (18)
    [III] In the sleeping hours of the second female subject under the prescribed age,
    Pulsation interval / activity <A7 ・ ・ ・ (19)
    HF / activity amount <B7 ... (20)
    (LF / HF) x activity amount> C7 ... (21)
    [IV] In the sleeping hours of the female subject over the second predetermined age,
    Pulsation interval / activity <A8 ・ ・ ・ (22)
    HF / activity amount <B8 ... (23)
    (LF / HF) x activity amount> C8 ... (24)
    However, A5 to A8, B5 to B8, and C5 to C8 are constants.
  17. 　前記拍動間隔として、心電信号におけるＲ波とＲ波との間隔であるＲＲ間隔を用いる請求項１４～１６のいずれか１項に記載のうつ状態判定システム。 The depression state determination system according to any one of claims 14 to 16, wherein the RR interval, which is the interval between the R waves and the R waves in the electrocardiographic signal, is used as the pulsation interval.
PCT/JP2021/044218 2020-12-22 2021-12-02 Discrimination method for determining depressive state, and depressive state determination system WO2022138040A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022572041A JP7276759B2 (en) 2020-12-22 2021-12-02 Determination method for determining depression, and depressive state determination system

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020212222 2020-12-22
JP2020-212222 2020-12-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022138040A1 true WO2022138040A1 (en) 2022-06-30

Family

ID=82159478

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/044218 WO2022138040A1 (en) 2020-12-22 2021-12-02 Discrimination method for determining depressive state, and depressive state determination system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7276759B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2022138040A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016031650A1 (en) * 2014-08-26 2016-03-03 東洋紡株式会社 Method for assessing depressive state and device for assessing depressive state
JP2018033795A (en) * 2016-09-01 2018-03-08 東洋紡株式会社 Depressive state determination method and depressive state determination device
JP2019170665A (en) * 2018-03-28 2019-10-10 株式会社疲労科学研究所 Fatigue determination device, fatigue determination method and program

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016031650A1 (en) * 2014-08-26 2016-03-03 東洋紡株式会社 Method for assessing depressive state and device for assessing depressive state
JP2018033795A (en) * 2016-09-01 2018-03-08 東洋紡株式会社 Depressive state determination method and depressive state determination device
JP2019170665A (en) * 2018-03-28 2019-10-10 株式会社疲労科学研究所 Fatigue determination device, fatigue determination method and program

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2022138040A1 (en) 2022-06-30
JP7276759B2 (en) 2023-05-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6208372B2 (en) Depression state determination method and depression state determination device
US20230293021A1 (en) Apparatus, system, and method for monitoring physiological signs
CN111246798B (en) Automatic detection of respiratory disorders
US20190159722A1 (en) Biological information analysis device, system, and program
JP6813837B2 (en) Activity rhythm judgment method and activity rhythm judgment device
JP6784368B2 (en) Depression state determination method and depression state determination device
WO2022138040A1 (en) Discrimination method for determining depressive state, and depressive state determination system
WO2022138041A1 (en) Assessment method for determination of being in depressed state, and depressed state determination system
US20240032859A1 (en) Sleep state prediction system
JP6865438B2 (en) Method and device for creating indicators to determine neuropsychiatric status
Alberto et al. Sensory system for the sleep disorders detection in the geriatric population
JP6927491B2 (en) Method and device for creating indicators to determine neuropsychiatric status
JP6927492B2 (en) Method and device for creating indicators to determine sleep disorders
Chen et al. Detection of Daily Lifestyle Change from Pulse Rate Measured during Sleep.

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21910192

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022572041

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A DATED 26.09.2023)